JP2018149131A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of speedily moving a movable body while maintaining stability with a simple configuration.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 capable of operating vertically; a lower accessory drive motor 1230; bosses 12405, 12407 capable of operating the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 upward by receiving power from the lower accessory drive motor 1230; and holes 12204, 12206 for regulating movement of the bosses 12405, 12407. The bosses 12405, 12407 are configured to be provided left and right and can be moved in synchronization, and the holes 12204, 12206 are configured to regulate movement of the bosses 12405, 12407 in predetermined limit positions even if the bosses 12405, 12407 receive power from the lower accessory drive motor 1230.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 101

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a win determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the win determination are known.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, an expected effect is made to expect that the result of the winning judgment is advantageous to the player so that the effect of the effect is enhanced. There is something.

  Examples of such an expected effect include a display effect displayed on a liquid crystal display and a movable object effect that operates a movable body. As a gaming machine in which a movable body effect is performed, a technique for moving a movable body in the vertical direction is known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-76208 A

  In recent years, variations in performance have been diversified. For example, in addition to moving the movable body in the vertical direction as in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the movable body is moved upward and then moved to the upper position. It is more preferable to perform an effect of holding the movable body.

  However, for example, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when performing an effect of holding the movable body in the upper position after moving the movable body upward, the movable body is moved to the upper position. After that, it is necessary to continue to apply a load against the load of the movable body to the motor or to newly provide a lock mechanism or the like that holds the movable body in the upper position. In addition, since there are players who shake the gaming machine, it is necessary to consider the possibility that an external force such as vibration acts on the movable body.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can hold | maintain a movable body suitably in an upper position by simple structure.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention uses power from a movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) operable in the vertical direction and a predetermined driving source (for example, the lower accessory driving motor 1230). And a force acting member (for example, bosses 12405, 12407) capable of operating the movable member upward. The force acting members are arranged side by side and the movable member A first force acting member (for example, a boss 12405) and a second force acting member (for example, a boss 12407) configured so that the movement locus of the force acting member draws an arc when operating upward; When the first force acting member and the second force acting member are operated to move the movable member upward, the moving locus draws an arc and at least the moving direction is a horizontal position ( For example, the first force application member and the second force application member are configured to be in opposite directions when moving to the uppermost end position) and moving in the horizontal direction. And

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the moving direction of the movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) moves to the horizontal direction, the movable member is operated with the movable member facing upward. After that, a device such as a lock mechanism for holding the movable member at the upper position is continuously added to the drive source (for example, the lower accessory drive motor 1230) to counter the load of the movable member at the upper position. It is possible to hold the movable body at the upper position with a simple configuration without providing it. This is because at the position where the moving direction of the movable member is the horizontal direction, the gravity of the movable member acts in the vertical direction, and the component force of the gravity is in the rotational direction of the force acting member (left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12406). It does not work.

  In addition, when the moving direction of the first force acting member (for example, the boss 12405) and the second force acting member (for example, the boss 12407) becomes the horizontal direction, the moving direction of the first force acting member and the second force acting Since the moving direction of the member is substantially opposite, for example, even if an external force acts on the movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) in any one direction, the movable member Can be prevented from descending.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the first rotation member having a substantially same diameter (for example, for example) provided in a pair in the left-right direction while rotating in synchronism with each other with the same position in the height direction of the rotation center. A left driven gear 12404) and a second rotating member (eg, right driven gear 12406), and the first force acting member (eg, boss 12405) and the second force acting member (eg, boss 12407) are respectively It is formed in the site | part which left | separated predetermined distance to the radial direction from the rotation center of the said 1st rotation member and the said 2nd rotation member.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the first force acting member (for example, the boss 12405) is formed at a position that is a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the rotation center of the first rotating member (for example, the left driven gear 12404). Since the second force acting member (for example, the boss 12407) is formed at a position that is a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the rotation center of the second rotating member (for example, the right driven gear 12406), the first rotating member In addition, the movable member can be held at the upper position with a simple configuration in which the second rotating member is simply rotated in the opposite direction.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably holding a movable body at an upper position with a simple configuration.

It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which shows the external appearance in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the front view which shows the external appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example which shows the external appearance perspective view of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example which shows the front disassembled perspective view which looked at the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from diagonally right above. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit containing a 1st and 2nd special symbol display part. It is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. (A) an example of a table showing the specifications of a special symbol game, (b) an example of a table showing the specifications of an ordinary symbol game, (c) an example of a table showing the distribution per game, and (d) a table showing the types of games It is an example. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of a game. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the basic specification of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 3 is an example of a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main control circuit. FIG. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the system timer interruption process performed with the main control circuit. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the special symbol control process performed with a main control circuit. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage check process performed with a main control circuit. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process performed with the main control circuit. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation time management process performed with the main control circuit. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process performed with a main control circuit. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process performed with the main control circuit. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the big winning opening reopening waiting time management process performed with the main control circuit. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the special winning opening release process performed with the main control circuit. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the hit end interval process performed with the main control circuit. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the special symbol game completion | finish process performed with the main control circuit. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the main process performed with a sub control circuit. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with a sub control circuit. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed with a sub control circuit. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed with a sub control circuit. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the continuation of FIG. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the hit start effect determination process performed with a sub control circuit. FIG. 10 is an example of a front view of the game board unit 17 showing a mode in which a game ball flows down the right region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened. FIG. 3 is an example of a front view of the game board unit 17 showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed. FIG. 10 is an example of a front view of the game board unit 17 showing a mode in which a game ball flows down the left region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176. It is an example of the rear view of the back unit 176. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the back unit 176 from the front right diagonal upper direction. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the back unit 176 from back diagonally upward. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back unit 176 from the front right diagonal upper direction. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back unit 176 from back diagonally upward. It is an example of the rear perspective view which looked at the attacker unit 500 from diagonally right above. 3 is an example of a front view of an attacker unit 500. FIG. 3 is an example of a side view of an attacker unit 500. FIG. 3 is an example of a plan view of an attacker unit 500. FIG. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the attacker unit 500 from diagonally forward right. 3 is an example of a front view showing a base member of an attacker unit 500. FIG. 4 is an example of a rear view showing a front side plate portion 520 of an attacker unit 500. FIG. 3 is an example of a front sectional view of an attacker unit 500. FIG. It is an example of the disassembled cross-sectional perspective view which looked at the attacker unit 500 from diagonally forward right. (A) An example of a plan view showing a prize winning solenoid 620, (b) an example of a plan view of a link arm 630, (c) an example of a plan view showing a shutter 610. (A) It is an example of the top view which shows the attacker unit 500 in case the shutter 610 is a 2nd position, (b) It is an example of the top view which similarly shows the special electric accessory 600. (A) It is an example of the top view which shows the attacker unit 500 in case the shutter 610 is a 1st position, (b) It is an example of the top view which similarly shows the special electric accessory 600. FIG. It is an example of the top view which shows the special electric accessory 6000 which concerns on 2nd embodiment. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the special electric accessory 6000 which concerns on 2nd embodiment from front diagonally upward. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the special electric accessory 6000 which concerns on 2nd embodiment from front diagonally upward. (A) An example of a plan view showing the housing portion 6001, (b) An example of a perspective view of the housing portion 6001 seen from the upper right front side, and (c) An example of a rear perspective view of the housing portion 6001 seen from the upper right side. It is. (A) An example of a plan view showing the big prize opening solenoid 6003, (b) An example of a perspective view of the big prize opening solenoid 6003 as viewed from the upper right diagonal direction, and (c) An example of the big prize opening solenoid 6003 as seen from the upper right angle. It is an example of a rear perspective view. (A) It is an example of the top view which shows the link arm 6004, (b) It is an example of the back perspective view seen from diagonally right upper side which shows the link arm 6004. (A) An example of a plan view showing the restricting member 6005, (b) an example of a perspective view of the restricting member 6005 viewed from the upper right, and (c) an example of a rear perspective view of the restricting member 6005 seen from the upper right. is there. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view showing an assembled configuration of the special electric accessory 6000 in a state where there is no housing portion 6001. It is an example of a front perspective view showing an assembled configuration of a big prize opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004, and a regulating member 6005. FIG. 10 is an example of a rear perspective view showing an assembly configuration of a big prize opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004, and a regulating member 6005. (A) It is an example of the top view which showed assembly | attachment structure of the big prize opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, and the control member 6005, (b) It is an example of the figure which abbreviate | omitted illustration of the link arm 6004 of (a). (A) An example of a plan view showing the assembled structure of the big prize opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005 in the closed state, (b) a view in which the illustration of the link arm 6004 in (a) is omitted. It is an example. (A) The top view which showed the assembly structure of the big prize opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004, and the control member 6005 when the driving force transmission part 6034 of the big prize opening solenoid 6004 starts a movement from the state shown in FIG. It is an example of the figure which abbreviate | omitted illustration of the link arm 6004 of an example and (b) (a). (A) The top view which showed the assembly structure of the big prize opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004, and the control member 6005 when the driving force transmission part 6034 of the big prize opening solenoid 6004 continues a movement from the state shown in FIG. It is an example of the figure which abbreviate | omitted illustration of the link arm 6004 of an example and (b) (a). FIG. 63A is a plan view showing the assembled configuration of the big prize opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005 when the driving force transmission unit 6034 of the big prize opening solenoid 6004 continues to move from the state shown in FIG. It is an example of the figure which abbreviate | omitted illustration of the link arm 6004 of an example and (b) (a). (A) An example of a schematic plan view showing a state of being locked by a regulating member 6005. (b) An example of a schematic plan view showing a state of being unlocked by a regulating member 6005. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the normal electric accessory unit 400 from diagonally forward right and upward. It is a part of the exploded perspective view which looked at the normal electric accessory unit 400 from the back diagonally upward. It is a figure which shows the normal electric accessory 460, the 2nd start port switch 441, and the accommodating member 443. FIG. It is a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460. It is an example of the rear view which looked at the ordinary electric accessory 460 from diagonally right above. An aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (illustrated by an alternate long and short dash line), and an ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is moving from the closed state toward the open state. It is an example of the rear view which shows the aspect (illustrated with a continuous line). An aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in a transition state (illustrated by a one-dot chain line), and an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in an open state (illustrated by a solid line) FIG. It is a rear view of the blade member 4620 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 for explaining the function of the flange connecting member 4646, (A) a view for explaining that the opening of the blade member 4620 is blocked, (B). It is a figure for demonstrating that opening | releasing of the blade member 4620 is permitted. It is an example of the front view of the upper front part 1000 in a normal mode (mode when it exists in an origin position). It is an example of the rear view of the upper front part 1000 in a normal mode. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper front part 1000 from the front right diagonal upper direction. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper front part 1000 from back diagonally upward. It is a front view which shows an example of the upper front accessory 1000 in an origin position. It is a front view which shows an example of the upper front accessory 1000 in which the movable decoration body 1040 is moving toward the downward direction. It is a front view which shows an example of the upper front surface accessory 1000 when the movable decoration body 1040 moves downward to the operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of the upper back part 1100 in a normal mode (mode when it exists in an origin position). It is an example of the rear view of the upper back part 1100 in a normal mode. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the upper back part 1100 from the front right diagonal. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper back part 1100 from the front right diagonal upper direction. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper back part 1100 from back diagonally upward. (A) An example of a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 82, and (B) an example of an enlarged view of a portion X shown in (A). (A) An example of a cross-sectional view taken along line BB shown in FIG. 82, and (B) an example of an enlarged view of a Y portion shown in (A). It is a figure which shows an example of the upper back surface 1100 in the normal mode (mode when it is in an origin position) before an operation start, Comprising: (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example before the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit position after the upper back part 1100 starts operating, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example when the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit positions, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. After the left upper arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 are operated to the operation limit position, the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 are further rotated, and the movable decorative body 1110 is moved to the paper surface by the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164. It is a figure which shows an example of an aspect when it operates toward the downward direction (when the covering decoration body 1120 starts operation | movement with respect to the movable decoration body 1110), Comprising: (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect which the covering decoration body 1120 moved to the operating limit with respect to the movable decoration body 1110, Comprising: (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is an example of the front view of the lower accessory 1200 in a normal mode (mode when it exists in an origin position). It is an example of the rear view of the lower accessory 1200 in a normal mode. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the lower accessory 1200 from diagonally upper right forward. It is an example of the rear perspective view which looked at the lower accessory 1200 from the diagonally upper left. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower accessory 1200 from diagonally upper right forward. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower accessory 1200 from back diagonally upward. It is a figure which shows an example of the lower accessory 1200 in the aspect when it exists in an origin position, Comprising: (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. FIG. 4 is a view showing an example of a lower accessory 1200 when operated to an intermediate position, in which (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example of the lower accessory 1200 at the time of act | operating to an action | operation limit, Comprising: (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is an example of the front view of the upper corner accessory 1320. It is an example of the rear view of the upper corner accessory 1320. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper corner accessory 1320 from the front right diagonal upper direction. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper corner part 1320 from back diagonally upward. It is an example in the rear view which shows when the 1st movable body 1330 and the 2nd movable body 1340 are in an origin position. It is an example of the rear view which shows when the 1st movable body 1330 and the 2nd movable body 1340 started the action | operation from the origin position. It is an example of the rear view which shows when the 1st movable body 1330 and the 2nd movable body 1340 act | operated further from the position shown in FIG. It is an example of the rear view which shows when the 1st movable body 1330 and the 2nd movable body 1340 act | operated to the operation limit position. It is a front view of the lower corner accessory 1350. It is an example of the rear view of the lower corner accessory 1350. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower corner accessory 1350 from the front right diagonal. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the lower corner accessory 1350 from the back diagonally upward. It is an example of the rear view which shows when the 3rd movable body 1355 and the 4th movable body 1357 are in an origin position. It is an example of the rear view which shows when the 3rd movable body 1355 and the 4th movable body 1357 start the action | operation from the origin position. It is an example of the rear view which shows when the 3rd movable body 1355 and the 4th movable body 1357 act | operated to the operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows a mode when all of the 1st movable body 1330, the 2nd movable body 1340, the 3rd movable body 1355, and the 4th movable body 1357 act | operated to the operation limit position. The front view of the back unit 176 showing an aspect when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position. It is an example. The front view of the back unit 176 showing a mode when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position. It is an example. It is an example of the front view of the side accessory 1400 in a normal mode. It is an example of the rear view of the side accessory 1400 in a normal mode. It is an example of the front view of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the side accessory 1400 from the front right diagonal. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the side accessory 1400 from back diagonally upward. 10 is a front view showing an example of a side accessory 1400 in which a movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of a display area of a liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. FIG. 11 is a rear view showing an example of a side accessory 1400 in which a movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 11 is a front view showing an example of a side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 11 is a rear view showing an example of a side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is a rear view which shows an example of the side accessory 1400 when the motor 1440 for a side accessory is further rotated in the same direction from the state which the movable decoration body 1450 advanced most toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. . It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 2nd middle panel 1550 from front diagonally upward. It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 2nd middle panel 1550 from back diagonally upward. (A) An example of the front view of the 2nd middle panel 1550, (B) It is an example of the CC sectional view shown to (A).

[Composition of gaming machine]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is an example of a front view showing an appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an example showing an external perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is an example showing an exploded perspective view of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention as seen from the upper front diagonally. FIG. 6 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including first and second special symbol display portions. FIG. 7 is an example of a block diagram showing the main control circuit. Further, the direction shown in the drawing is a direction in a front view. Therefore, for example, “left” written in the right direction in the drawing is the rear view, and therefore “right” in the drawing is “left” in the front view. Similarly, in the case where “right” is written in the left direction of the drawing, “left” on the drawing is “right” in the front view for the same reason.

  In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the front-rear direction is defined with the front side as the front side and the back side as the rear side when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left and right directions are defined with the left hand side as the left side and the right hand side as the right side. Furthermore, the front is a surface that is visible when viewed from the player side, and the back is a surface that is visible when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, a game board unit 17, a payout unit 18, And the substrate unit 19 is provided.

  The wooden frame 11 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back side, and the glass door 13, the dish unit 14, the launching device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16, and the game board unit 17 on the front side. Support.

  The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22. A transparent protective glass 23 is disposed in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is disposed so as to face a game board unit 17 (to be described later) in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. In addition, a speaker 24 and a lamp 25 are disposed on the upper portion of the glass door 13. The speaker 24 performs, for example, voice notification, production, error notification, and the like. The lamp 25 is for performing, for example, notification with light or production.

  The dish unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper dish 26 and the lower dish 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is disposed at the front lower part of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13.

  The upper plate 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 are launched from the launching device 15 toward a game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout outlet 61 and an effect button 62. The game balls to be rented and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 26 from the payout opening 61. The effect button 62 is a so-called “CHANCE button” or “push button”. The effect button 62 is operated by the player.

  The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout outlet 63. The game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26 are paid out to the lower plate 27 from the payout outlet 63.

  The launching device 15 is for firing a game ball stored in the upper plate 26 toward the game area 20. The launching device 15 is disposed at the lower right front of the base door 12 and at the lower right of the dish unit 14. The launching device 15 includes a panel body 31, a driving device (not shown), and a firing handle 32.

  The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is disposed on the surface side of the panel body 31. The driving device is disposed on the back side of the panel body 31 and is configured by, for example, a firing solenoid. Thus, in the launching device 15, when the launch handle 32 is operated by the player, a game ball is launched by the operation of the driving device in accordance with the operation.

  The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of the hit determination and various images related to the game. The various images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 16 include, for example, an effect identification symbol (decoration symbol), a jackpot effect image, a demonstration effect image, the number of times the identification symbol variation display is suspended, and the like. included. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is disposed at the approximate center of the game board unit 17 (the inner peripheral side of a center rail 1742 described later).

  The game board unit 17 is disposed in front of the base door 12 so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 23. On the front side surface of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll down is formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board unit 17 is disposed at a substantially central portion of the game area 20 and a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow is formed. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, the passing gate 49, and the back unit 176 are provided. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172.

  In the transparent panel 172, an opening 1722 is formed at a portion where a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 described later is disposed. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, a guide rail 26 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, and game nails and the like are implanted therein. The game ball launched from the launching device 15 jumps out from the guide rail 26 toward the game area 20, collides with a game nail or the like, and flows downward toward the game area 20 while changing the traveling direction.

  The guide rail 26 includes two rail-like members (hereinafter referred to as “outer rail 26a” and “inner rail 26b”). The game area 20 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 26. The inner rail 26b, together with the outer rail 26a, is for guiding the launched game ball to the upper part of the game area 20. The inner rail 26b is disposed inside the outer rail 26a on the left side of the transparent panel 172.

  The center unit 174 includes a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The center rail 1742 is disposed in the upper part of the game area 20, and divides the flow area of game balls in the game area 20 into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742.

  The game balls launched by the launcher 15 are divided into the left and right of the center rail 1742 and flow down the game area 20, and the game balls flowing down the game area 20 are planted in the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to a collision with a game nail or the like installed, it flows downward while changing the direction of travel. The discharged game balls are distributed to the flow-down area according to the operation amount of the launch handle 52. Specifically, when the operation amount of the launch handle 52 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left region of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the operation amount of the launch handle 52 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region of the center rail 1742. The method of hitting the game ball down to the left region of the center rail 1742 is called “left-handed”, and the method of hitting the game ball down to the right region of the center rail 1742 is called “right-handed”. It can be decided by the player.

  The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first start port 5442, the special prize opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is disposed at the lower right portion of the gaming area 20 and below the passing gate 49.

  The big winning opening 540 is a part that can be opened in a hit game state (a big hit game state or a small hit game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is disposed at the big prize opening 540 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins the big winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the payout opening 47 to the upper plate 42 (or from the payout port 48 to the lower plate 44).

  The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can be moved back and forth in the front-rear direction, and a special prize opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 7) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is disposed above the special prize opening 540. When the shutter 610 is driven by the special prize opening solenoid 620, the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which a game ball can be awarded (or easily) to the special prize opening 540, and to the special prize opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state in which winning of a game ball is impossible (or difficult). The opening operation by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is based on the result of the hit determination performed when the game ball wins at the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 described later, This is performed when the game state or the small hit game state is entered. In addition, the result of the hit determination performed when a game ball wins at the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 described later is obtained as a special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. This is indicated by the stop display mode.

  The first start port 5442 provides a trigger for hitting determination based on the winning (passing) of the game ball, and triggers the result of the hit determination to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a first special symbol display unit 73 described later. Is to give. The first start port 5442 is provided with a first start port switch 5472 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins the first start port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472, a hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 7), and a predetermined number of game balls are received from the payout opening 61. It is discharged (discharged) to the upper plate 26 or from the discharge outlet 63 to the lower plate 27. The winning of the game ball to the first start port 5442 is made by left-handed.

  The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second start port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is disposed substantially at the lower left of the game area 20. The second start port 440 and the out port 450 are disposed adjacent to each other, and the second start port 440 is disposed on the right side when viewed from the front, and the out port 450 is disposed on the left side when viewed from the front. Conventionally, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is often arranged below the first start port 5442, for example. However, in recent years, it has been required to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device 16, and it is difficult to dispose the liquid crystal display device 16 below the first start port 5442. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is disposed substantially at the lower left portion of the gaming area 20.

  The second start port 440 provides an opportunity for a hit determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed), and an opportunity for displaying the result of the hit determination on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a second special symbol display unit 74 described later. Is to give. The second start port 440 is provided with a second start port switch 441 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins the second start port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441, a hit determination is made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 5), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out 61. Is discharged from the discharge tray 63 to the upper plate 27 (discharged). The second starting port 440 is determined to be difficult to win by the ordinary electric accessory 460. In principle, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-handed.

  As will be described in detail later, the ordinary electric accessory 460 transmits the power of the blade member 4620, the start port solenoid 4630, and the start port solenoid 4630 (for example, see FIG. 74) that can be rotated rightward to the blade member 4620. A power transmission mechanism 4640 (see, for example, FIG. 74) is provided. When the blade member 4620 is driven by the start opening solenoid 4630, the ordinary electric accessory 460 can be shifted (driven) between an open state in which the game ball can easily pass and a closed state in which the game ball cannot easily pass. Configured. If the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is being driven, the game ball wins the second start port 440 or is discharged from the out port 450 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is done. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620) is performed for a predetermined period and number of times when the ordinary symbol is in a specific stop display mode in the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

  The passing gate 49 provides a trigger for normal symbol determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed). The passage gate 49 is disposed on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. The passage gate 49 is provided with a passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 7). When a game ball passes through the pass gate 49, the passed game ball is detected by the pass gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). Note that the game ball is passed to the passing gate 49 by right-handed.

  The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first start port 5442, the special prize opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is disposed substantially at the lower right of the game area 20. The reason why the attacker unit 500 is arranged substantially at the lower right of the gaming area 20 is that it is recently required to enlarge the liquid crystal display device 16, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the gaming area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid the enlarged liquid crystal display device 16.

  The big winning opening 540 is a part that can be opened in a hit game state (a big hit game state or a small hit game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is disposed at the big prize opening 540 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins the big winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

  The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can be moved back and forth in the front-rear direction, and a special prize opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 7) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is disposed above the special prize opening 540. When the shutter 610 is driven by the special prize opening solenoid 620, the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which a game ball can be awarded (or easily) to the special prize opening 540, and to the special prize opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state in which winning of a game ball is impossible (or difficult). In the opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610), the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74, and the winning game state (big hit gaming state or This is performed when the game is shifted to the small hit game state.

  The general winning ports 53, 54, and 55 are disposed at the lower left portion of the game board unit 17, and the general winning ports 56 are disposed at the lower right portion of the game board unit 17. Further, the general winning opening 53, 54, 55 and 56 are provided with general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a and 56a (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When the game balls are detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27). (Discharged).

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 have three award balls, the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, and 56 have ten award balls, The number of prize balls is set to 15 each. This value (number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

  The out port 57 is arranged at the lowermost center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the flow-down direction of the game ball). The out port 57 is finally flowed in when the launched game ball does not win any start port or winning port.

  The LED unit 70 is disposed at the lower right portion of the game board unit 17 and outside the guide rail 41. The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 includes, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special symbol display unit. A symbol hold display portion 75 and a second special symbol hold display portion 76 are provided.

  The normal symbol display unit 71 displays the result of determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the ordinary electric accessory 460 according to the result of determination (ordinary symbol determination). The normal symbol display unit 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. The display LEDs 71a and 71b start changing display that alternately turns on and off when a predetermined change display start condition is satisfied. A combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the variable display.

  When the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination) is a win, the combination of turning on / off the display LEDs 71a and 71b (special symbol) is a specific stop display mode. Thus, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern. The difficulty of winning a game ball to 440 is changed.

  The normal symbol hold display section 72 displays the number of executions of the fluctuation display of the normal symbols that are held (hereinafter referred to as “the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol fluctuation display”). The normal symbol hold display section 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol hold display unit 72 displays the number of times the normal symbol fluctuating display is held by a combination of turning on / off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the normal symbol variation display is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the normal symbol variation display is suspended twice, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned on. When the execution of the normal symbol variation display is suspended three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the normal symbol variation display is suspended four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

  The 1st special symbol display part 73 and the 2nd special symbol display part 74 display the result (judgment determination) result with respect to a special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of determination (winning determination).

  The 1st special symbol display part 73 comprises the display LED group 73a which consists of 8 LED. The display LED group 73a performs a variable display triggered by a winning of a game ball (start winning) at the first start port 5442, and displays a result of a hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When a predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variation display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting variable display.

  When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball at the first start port 5442 is a win, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) is a specific stop display mode. . Thus, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming state in which a game ball can win a prize winning opening 540 Become. In the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 based on the winning of the game ball at the first start port 5442 is referred to as a first special symbol.

  The second special symbol display unit 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a displays a variation display triggered by a winning of a game ball (start winning) at the second starting port 440, and displays a result of a hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When a predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts variation display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting variable display.

  When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440 is a win, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. . Thus, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming state in which a game ball can win a prize winning opening 540 Become. In the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  Thus, in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the winning gaming state that is advantageous to the player is determined. In the present embodiment, the hit determination includes a big hit determination and a small hit determination. That is, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state as a winning gaming state. Further, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the gaming state is shifted to the small hit gaming state as a winning gaming state. As described above, in the present embodiment, two types of hit gaming states are provided as gaming states that shift from the normal gaming state.

  The first special symbol hold display section 75 and the second special symbol hold display section 76 indicate the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol being held (hereinafter referred to as “the special symbol variable display hold count”). To display. The first special symbol hold display section 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display section 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 display the number of times of special symbol change display hold by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a and 75b and 76a and 76b. The display mode of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a and 75b and 76a and 76b is the same as that of the display LEDs 72a and 72b of the normal symbol hold display section 72.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17 and is arranged at the upper part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and behind the upper front part 1000. And an upper back accessory 1100 disposed on the upper side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 36), a lower accessory 1200 disposed below the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and a liquid crystal display A corner accessory 1300 is arranged so that a movable body, which will be described later, is positioned at four corners of the display area of the device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 36), and is arranged on the right side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A side accessory 1400, a middle panel 1500, an attacker ball cage 1600, a main board case 1700, and each of the above-mentioned accessories and a main board case 1700 are attached to form a unit. And a rear box 1800 that. Details of each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400 provided in the back unit 176 will be described later.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, an outline of internal processing when a game ball wins the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 will be described.

  When the game ball wins the first start port 5442, the first start port switch 5472 detects the winning game ball and starts the first special symbol based on the game ball winning on the first special symbol display unit 73. The storage is suspended (the first special symbol variable display is started). As for the suspension of the start memory for the first special symbol, both the variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. It is canceled on condition that there is no. In other words, if a game ball is won at the first start port 5442 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, the start-up memory is released after the special symbol being displayed is stopped. When the game ball is won at the first start port 5442 when neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is displayed, the hold of the start memory is immediately released. When the hold of the start memory is released, the first special symbol display unit 73 starts the variable display of the first special symbol.

  When the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, and the start of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the game ball to the second starting port 440 is started. The storage is suspended (the second special symbol variable display is suspended). As for the suspension of the start memory for the second special symbol, both the variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. It is canceled on condition that there is no. In other words, if a game ball wins at the second start opening 440 during the display of the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the suspension of the start memory is released after the special symbol during the variation display is stopped and displayed. When the game ball is won at the second starting port 440 when neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is displayed, the holding of the starting memory is immediately released. When the hold of the start memory is released, the second special symbol display unit 74 starts to display the variation of the second special symbol.

  In the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change at the same time. That is, while one of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is displaying a special symbol variation display, the other display unit does not perform a special symbol variation display. . In the present embodiment, when both the start memory for the first special symbol and the start memory for the second special symbol are held, the second special symbol regardless of which start memory is held first. Priority is given to the cancellation | release of the hold | maintenance about the start memory about, and the 2nd special symbol display part 73 performs the variable display of the 2nd special symbol.

  In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols. In the present embodiment, the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols is set to an upper limit of 4 times. Therefore, the maximum number of suspensions of the special symbol variation display is eight times, which is the total number of suspensions of the special symbol variation display due to winning in the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440.

  In addition, during the change of the first or second special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the identification symbol consisting of numbers changes on the liquid crystal display device 16 except in specific cases. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, symbols from “1” to “8” are used as the numbers. In addition, the identification symbol variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed with the first or second special symbol being variably displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 being stopped and stopped. Is displayed. The identification symbol is also used as presentation identification information.

  Further, when the first or second special symbol stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is in a specific stop display mode, the player is notified that it is a win. The effect image to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In the present embodiment, as described later, a plurality of types of hits are provided. Moreover, the specific stop display mode in the case where the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed is set corresponding to the winning type. In such a configuration, the combination of identification symbols that are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. It becomes an aspect. Thereby, the player can recognize the type of winning in addition to winning. Note that some of the winning types have a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. According to this, it is difficult for the player to recognize the winning and the type of the winning.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
Hereinafter, a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 100 that controls a game and a sub control circuit 200 that controls an effect according to the progress of the game.

  The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like.

  A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the main ROM 102.

  The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

  The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. In this embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable / writable storage medium may be used.

  The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing information on special symbol games as start-up storage. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, a first special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as a start memory, and a first upper limit of four times are stored. There are provided a first special symbol start storage area (4) to a first special symbol start storage area (4) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as a start memory. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, a second special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol being changed is stored as a start memory, and a second special symbol for the upper limit of four times. There are provided a second special symbol start storage area (4) to a second special symbol start storage area (4) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as a start memory.

  The main control circuit 100 also includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by quickly supplying power to the main RAM 103, for example, when power is cut off.

  Various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

  For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, a first special symbol hold display unit 75, A second special symbol hold display section 76, a start port solenoid 4630 that drives the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, a big prize port solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. In addition, the main control circuit 100 is used to transmit data to a call device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of hits, and a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines throughout the hall. An external terminal board 320 is connected.

  The main control circuit 100 is connected to a first start port switch 5472, a second start port switch 441, a pass gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, general winning port switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, and the like. . When a game ball is detected by these members, the main control circuit 100 is supplied with a predetermined detection signal from the members. The main control circuit 100 is connected to a backup clear switch 330 and the like for clearing backup data in the event of a power interruption in accordance with the operation of the game hall manager.

  The main control circuit 100 is connected to a payout / launch control circuit 300. The payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to a payout device 340 for paying out game balls, a launch device 15 for launching game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. The payout device 340 is provided in the payout unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation to the ball lending operation panel 370 is supplied.

  Upon receiving a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 or a lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, the payout / launch control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340, Control is performed to cause the payout device 340 to pay out the game ball. Further, when the launch handle 32 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, the payout / launch control circuit 300 supplies power to the launch solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Supply and control to fire game balls.

  Further, the sub control circuit 200 is connected to the command output port 106. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the liquid crystal display device 16, control related to sound generated from the speaker 24, control related to the light of the lamp 25, and the like in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  In the present embodiment, the command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 while the signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that a signal can be transmitted to the main control circuit 100 from the control circuit 200. FIG.

  The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 204, an audio control circuit 205, a lamp control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, and the like. The sub control circuit 200 executes an effect corresponding to the progress of the game in accordance with a command from the main control circuit 100. The sub-control circuit 200 is connected to an effect button switch 310 that is turned on / off by operating the effect button 62.

  The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the game effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as storage means for storing programs, tables, and the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a storage medium that can be read by a computer having control means. Any other embodiment may be used. For example, a storage medium such as a hard disk device, a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge may be used as the storage unit. Further, the program, the table, and the like may not be recorded in advance but may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Further, the programs, tables, and the like may be recorded on different storage media.

  The work RAM 203 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. In this embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable / writable storage medium may be used.

  The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM storing data for generating various image data, a frame buffer for buffering image data, and image data as image signals. And a D / A converter or the like for conversion.

  The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 in accordance with data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Note that the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as identification symbol image data indicating an identification symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

  Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal, and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can perform control to display an image related to the game on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The sound control circuit 205 is a circuit for performing control related to sound generated from the speaker 24. The audio control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that performs control related to audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying an audio signal, and the like.

  The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in accordance with the sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the sound signal and generates sound from the speaker 24.

  The lamp control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the lamp 25 including a decorative lamp. The lamp control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

  The accessory control circuit 207 is a circuit for controlling each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400. The accessory control circuit 207 includes a driving circuit for supplying a driving signal to each of the accessories 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, and 1400, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern. Has an accessory data ROM or the like stored therein.

  Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in accordance with the accessory operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400. The lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is supplied to control the lighting operation of each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400.

[basic specifications]
Hereinafter, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 8 is a table showing the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, FIG. 8A is a table showing the specifications of the special symbol game. FIG. 8B is a table showing the specifications of the normal symbol game. FIG. 8C is a table showing the hit distribution. FIG. 8D is a table showing the hit types. Note that the data in the tables shown in FIGS. 8A to 8D is stored in the main ROM 102 as a table.

  In the special symbol game, the big hit determination is performed in a low probability state or a high probability state. In this way, in a special symbol game, a gaming state in which a big hit determination is performed in a low probability state is simply referred to as a low probability state (or a normal state or an uncertain change state). In a special symbol game, a gaming state in which a big hit determination is performed in a high probability state is simply referred to as a high probability state (or probability variation state). Thus, when the gaming state becomes a probable change state, a state more advantageous than the normal state is given to the player.

  In the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is performed in a high probability state or a low probability state. The probability of hitting a normal symbol in the high probability state is 100/100. The probability of hitting a normal symbol in the low probability state is 1/60. When the result of the normal symbol determination in the high probability state is a win, the normal electric accessory 460 is released (ordinary hit game), and 1.5 seconds per release is performed three times. When the result of the normal symbol determination in the low probability state is a win, the normal electric accessory 460 is released (ordinary hit game), and the release for 2.0 seconds is performed only once. In a normal symbol game, a gaming state in which normal symbol determination is performed with a high probability state is referred to as an electric support state. When not in the electric support state (low probability state), the time per normal symbol determination is 3.0 seconds. A gaming state (a gaming state other than the short-time state) in which the normal symbol determination is performed with a low probability is referred to as a normal state (or a non-short-time state). In the electric support state, the time per normal symbol determination is shorter than in the normal state. As described above, a state in which the current state is the electric support state and is performed in a short time per normal symbol determination is referred to as a time reduction state. It should be noted that the high probability state of the normal symbol determination is configured to be able to shift when the jackpot gaming state ends or the like. Moreover, the high probability state of the normal symbol determination ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, for example, when the time reduction state ends. The time reduction state is continued until a hit determination (a big hit determination and a small hit determination) is performed a predetermined number of times after the transition from the normal state, for example, in a special symbol game.

  As described above, the normal state refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot determination is performed in a low probability state in the special symbol game, and a gaming state in which the normal symbol determination is performed with a low probability in the normal symbol game. Yes.

  First, the specifications of the special symbol game will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, in the special symbol game, the probability that the result of jackpot determination in the low probability state (normal state) will be a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a jackpot probability) In any case of the start winning of the start port 440, it is commonly set to 1/200 (one coefficient for 200 random numbers). In addition, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (probability variation state) is 1/100 (200 random numbers) in common in any of the start winnings of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440. 2 coefficients). Further, the probability that the result of the small hit determination will be a win by the start winning of the second start port 440 (hereinafter referred to as the small hit probability) is 1/4 (50 coefficients for 200 random numbers). Is set. Note that the small hit determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 is not performed. In other words, the probability that the small hit game is started based on the game ball winning at the second start port 440 is that the small hit game is started based on the game ball winning at the first start port 5442. It is set higher than the probability.

  In addition, the ST number is set to 100 times in common regardless of whether the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 is a big win due to the start winning. Note that ST (special time) is a probability variation state that ends according to the number of times (number-of-times cut type). In the following description, unless otherwise specified, “times” indicates the number of hit determinations (big hit determination and small hit determination) after shifting to the probability variation state.

  Note that the ST number is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 when a super-probability change state described later is reached. Specifically, when the super-probability change state is entered, 0 is displayed as the initial value. Each time the hit determination is repeated once (the determination result is lost), a state in which a numerical value is incremented by 1 is displayed. Then, when the numerical value of the number of STs reaches 100, the super-probability change state ends. The initial value may be 100 instead of 0. Thus, when the initial value of the ST count is 100, the numerical value is subtracted by 1 each time the hit determination is repeated once.

  In addition, the number of winning balls for winning at the first starting port 5442 is three, the number of winning balls for winning at the second starting port 440 is one, and the number of winning balls for winning at the general winning ports 53, 54, 55 is The number of winning balls for 10 winning prizes to the big winning opening 540 is set to 15 respectively. Further, the maximum winning count number per opening of the big winning opening 540 in the big hit game is set to 10 counts. In addition, the maximum winning count per opening of the ordinary electric accessory 460 in the normal symbol game is set to 10 counts. Further, regardless of the start winning of either the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440, the number of jackpot symbols is set to 100 in common. Further, the number of small winning symbols in the case of starting winning a prize at the second starting port 440 is set to 100.

  Next, the specifications of the normal symbol game will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is not performed in a low probability state. In addition, the probability that the result of the normal symbol determination in the high probability state is set to 100/100 is set. When the result of the normal symbol determination is a win, the second start port 440 (ordinary electric accessory 460) is opened three times for 1.5 seconds, which is a relatively long time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8C, the distribution of the big hit and the small hit will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (c), the big hit by the start winning of the first start port 5442 is distributed into six types of big hit contents (big hit types). Specifically, the jackpot due to the start winning of the first start port 5442 is distributed to 15R probability change, substantially 10R probability change, substantially 5R probability change, 15R normal, substantially 10R normal, and substantially 5R normal. The contents of these jackpots are set so as to correspond to special figures (1) jackpots -1 to 6 as a jackpot by the start winning of the first starting port 5442, respectively.

  Specifically, the 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) big hit -1. Further, a special 10R probability change is set corresponding to the special figure (1) big hit -2. Further, a special 5R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) big hit -3. Moreover, 15R normal is set corresponding to special figure (1) big hit -4. Further, in response to the special figure (1) big hit -5, substantially 10R normal is set. Further, in response to the special figure (1) big hit -6, a substantial 5R normal is set.

  Further, the jackpot due to the start winning of the second starting port 440 is distributed into six types of jackpot contents (jacket types). Specifically, the jackpot due to the start winning of the second start port 440 is distributed to 15R probability change, real appearance small amount change, special probability change, 15R normal, real appearance small normal, special normal. These jackpot contents are set so as to correspond to the special figure (2) jackpots -1 to 6 as the jackpot by the start winning of the second starting port 440, respectively.

  Specifically, the 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (2) big hit -1. In addition, a substantial variation of the ball appearance is set corresponding to the special figure (2) big hit -2. In addition, special probability variation is set corresponding to special figure (2) big hit -3. Moreover, 15R normal is set corresponding to special figure (2) big hit -4. Further, a special normal amount of balls is set corresponding to the special figure (2) big hit -5. Also, special normal is set corresponding to special figure (2) big hit -6.

  The small hits are divided into two types of small hit contents (small hit types). Specifically, the small hits are divided into two times (1) and two times (2). These small hit contents are set so as to correspond to the special figure (2) small hits -1 and 2 as the small hits, respectively. Specifically, two times of opening (1) is set corresponding to the special figure (2) small hit -1. Further, in response to the special figure (2) small hit -2, the opening twice (2) is set.

  Here, the “number” column (notation) shown in the table of FIG. 8C indicates the number of big hit symbols or the number of small hit symbols corresponding to each hit content. That is, as described above, since the number of jackpot symbols due to the start winning of the first start port 5442 is 100, the special figure (1) jackpot -1 to 6 is a jackpot due to the start winning of the first start port 5442. Probability (expected value) for each distribution is set to be 25%, 15%, 10%, 25%, 15%, 10%. Similarly, when the special figure (2) jackpot -1 to 6 is a jackpot due to the start winning of the second starting port 440, the probability (expected value) to be assigned is 25%, 15%, 10%, It is set to be 25%, 15%, 10%. Similarly, the special figure (2) small hits -1 and 2 are set so that the probability (expected value) to be allocated is 98% and 2%, respectively, when the small hits are small hits.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8 (c), special figure (1) big hit -1 to 6, special figure (2) big hit -1 to 6, and special figure (2) small hit -1 and 2, A short time is set after each winning game (big hit game or small hit game) is completed. The number of time reductions given after the winning game ends is set to be different depending on the state of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game when the big hit determination or the small hit determination is performed.

  Here, the notation “HH” shown in the table of FIG. 8C indicates that the special symbol game is in a probable change state and the normal symbol game is in a short-time state. The notation “HL” indicates that the special symbol game is in a probable variation state and that the normal symbol game is in a non-time-short state. The notation “LH” indicates that the special symbol game is in an uncertain change state and the normal symbol game is in a short time state. The notation “LL” indicates that the special symbol game is in a non-probable change state and the normal symbol game is in a non-time-short state. Furthermore, the notation “between high probabilities” indicates that a special symbol game is given a high probability state, that is, a maximum of 100 time reductions.

  In such a setting, for example, when the special symbol game is in a non-probable change state and the normal symbol game is in a non-time-short state (in the case of “LL”), the special symbol (1) big hit -1 or 6 big hit , 50 times are assigned. On the other hand, for example, similarly in the case of “LL”, if the special figure (1) big hit -2 to 5 big hits, the number of time reductions is not given. That is, when the special symbol game is in a non-probable change state and the normal symbol game is in a non-time-short state, if it is a big hit by the start winning of the first start port 5442, 35% (special figure (1) big hit- The number of time reductions is given 50 times with a probability of 25% in the case of 1 + 10% in the special figure (1) big hit -6), and the time reduction number is not given with the remaining 65% probability.

  In the case of the small hit, after the small hit game is finished, the game state before the small hit is not changed in principle and is maintained as it is. Specifically, when a small hit is made during the ST, the ST is restarted after the small hit game is finished, so as to continue counting from the ST count related to the hit determination for the small hit. For example, during the ST, when a small hit is made at the 60th time, the ST is restarted so that counting is started from the 61st time after the end of the small hit game. In this case, the remaining number of STs after the end of the small hit game is 40 times. Similarly, when a small hit is made during the short-time state, the short-time state is resumed after the small-hit game is finished, so that counting is continued from the number of times related to the hit determination.

  As an exception to the above principle, for example, if a small hit is made at the 100th time (which is the final time of ST) during ST, ST is ended after the small hit game ends (the state before the small hit) Is not maintained). Similarly, for example, if a small hit is made at the 100th time in the short-time state of 100 times, the short-time state is ended after the small-hit game is finished (the state before the small-hit is not maintained).

  Hereinafter, the winning content (big hit content and small hit content) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the content of the big hit (type of big hit) is 15R probability variation, 15R normal, substantial 10R probability variation, substantial 10R normal, substantial 5R probability variation, substantial 5R normal, special probability variation, special normal, substantial output. There is a slight variation, and a small amount of actual appearance. In addition, two small openings (1) and (2) are provided as small hit contents (small hit types).

  15R probability change and 15R normal is a jackpot where the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 per round is 27.996 seconds in all rounds of all 15 rounds when the jackpot game is started. is there. In this way, in the 15R probability variation and 15R normal, when the big hit game is started, the upper limit number of game balls are set to be able to win the big winning opening 540 in all rounds.

  The real 10R probability change and the real 10R normal means that when the big hit game is started, the number of open seconds of the big prize opening 540 per round is 27.996 seconds in the 1st to 10th rounds out of all 15 rounds. This is a jackpot in which the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 per round in the eleventh to fifteenth rounds is set to 0.102 seconds. As described above, in the actual 10R probability change and the actual 10R normal, when the big hit game is started, the game ball is set to be able to enter the big winning opening 540 in the 1st to 10th rounds, and in the 11th to 15th rounds. The game ball is set so that it is difficult (substantially impossible) to win the big winning opening 540.

  The real 5R probability change and the real 5R normal means that when the big hit game is started, the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 per round in the first to fifth rounds is 27.996 seconds when the big hit game is started. This is a jackpot in which the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 per round in the sixth to fifteenth rounds is set to 0.102 seconds. In this way, in the real 5R probability change and the real 5R normal, when the big hit game is started, the game ball is set to be able to enter the big winning opening 540 in the 1st to 5th rounds, and in the 6th to 15th rounds. The game ball is set so that it is difficult (substantially impossible) to win the big winning opening 540.

  Special probability change and special normal are set so that the big prize opening 540 is opened three times in the first round of all 15 rounds when the big hit game is started, and the first round In the first and second opening, the opening number of the grand prize opening 540 is set to 0.896 seconds, and in the remaining third opening, the opening number of the big winning opening 540 is set to 26.466 seconds. From the 15th round to the 15th round, the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 per round is a big hit set at 27.966 seconds. In this way, in the special probability change and special normal, when the big hit game is started, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big winning opening 540 in the first and second rounds in the first round (for example, 1 per round It is set so that the upper limit number of game balls can be won in the big winning opening 540 in the remaining third release and the 2nd to 15th rounds. In the special probability change and special normal, the interval between releases between the second release and the third release in the first round is set to 5.0 seconds.

  In the case of the real appearance small play change and the real play small normal, when the big hit game is started, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is 0 in the first to second rounds out of all 15 rounds. Is set to 896 seconds, and is the jackpot in which the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 per round in the third to fifteenth rounds is set to 0.102 seconds. As described above, in the case where there is a substantial change in the actual number of balls and a small amount of actual balls, when the big hit game is started, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big winning opening 540 in all rounds (more specifically, the first and second rounds Is set so that, for example, one game ball is won per opening and the game ball is almost impossible to win after the third round. Note that the interval between rounds between the second round and the third round is set to 5.0 seconds in the case where there is a substantial change in the actual number of balls and the normal number of balls in the actual number.

  Opening twice (1) and (2) are small hits that open the big winning opening 540 twice every 0.896 seconds when the small hit game is started. That is, the small hit game is to operate the big prize opening 540 in a predetermined opening / closing manner. Thus, in the two-time opening (1) and (2), even if the small hit game is started, the game The ball is set so that it is difficult to win a ball in the big winning opening 540 (for example, about one winning per opening). In the second opening (1), the small hitting end interval after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is set to 1.0 second. In the second opening (2), the small hitting end interval after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is set to 5.0 seconds.

  Thus, when the type of jackpot is special probability variation and special normal, the number of seconds of opening of the big winning opening 540 in the first and second rounds of the first round, and the case of the small jackpot (open twice (1) And in the case of (2)), the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 in the first and second opening is set to 0.896 seconds which are the same as each other. In other words, the special probability change and special normal, and the small hits (two times opening (1) and (2)), the opening mode of the big prize opening 540 is the same until the second opening of the big prize opening 540 is completed. Is set. In this way, the special probability variation and special normal big hit games open and close the big prize opening 540 in a predetermined opening / closing mode (pseudo small hit open / close mode) that makes the small hit game appear in the first and second rounds of the first round. It is something to be made.

  It should be noted that in the small hits (second open (1) and (2)), the hit end intervals after the opening of the second big winning opening 540 are set to be different from each other. Specifically, in the second opening (1), the hit end interval after the opening of the second big prize opening 540 is set to 1.0 second. Further, in the second opening (2), the hit end interval after the opening of the second big prize opening 540 is set to 5.0 seconds.

  In addition, the interval between the opening between the second opening and the third opening in the special probability change and special normal and the small hit end interval in the second opening (2) of the small hits are the same number of seconds. (5.0 seconds). That is, in the special probability change and special normal, and the small opening twice (2), the opening mode of the big prize opening 540 is set to be the same until the third opening of the big prize opening 540 is started. In other words, the special probability change and special normal jackpot games are determined to be jackpot games after the third release of the first round is performed. In this way, the special probability variation and special normal big hit games are operated in the pseudo small hit opening / closing mode, and then the special winning opening 540 is opened / closed in a specific opening / closing mode (opening / closing mode after the big hit is found) that turns out to be a big hit game. It is something to be made.

  Similarly, the number of seconds for opening the big winning opening 540 in the opening of the first and second rounds when the type of the big hit is a real change in the actual number of balls and the normal amount of the actual number of balls and the case of a small hit (opened twice) In the case of (1) and (2)), the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 in the first and second opening is set to 0.896 seconds which are the same as each other. In other words, the actual payout small change, the normal play small normal, and the small hit (2 times opening (1) and (2)) are the big prize opening 540 until the second opening of the big prize opening 540 is completed. Are set to be the same.

  In addition, the interval between rounds between the opening of the second round and the opening of the third round in the actual change of the actual number of balls and the normal amount of the actual number of balls, and the small hit end interval in the second opening (2) of the small hits Are set to the same number of seconds (5.0 seconds). That is, the actual appearance of a small amount of balls and the normal amount of small numbers of balls and the small opening twice (2) means that the opening mode of the big prize opening 540 is until the third opening of the big prize opening 540 is started. Set the same. In this way, the big hit game of the real hitting small probability change and the real hitting little normal hit game is a big winning opening 540 in a predetermined opening / closing mode (pseudo small hitting opening / closing mode) that looks like the small hit game in the first and second rounds of opening. Is opened and closed.

[Game flow]
Below, the flow of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described using FIG. 9 and FIG.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game proceeds while repeating the transition to an appropriate gaming state at a predetermined timing. Here, a corresponding production mode is set for each of the gaming states. Various production contents are set in the production mode. That is, when the game is started, the game state is shifted to an appropriate game state, and an effect in the effect mode corresponding to the transferred game state is performed. In the present embodiment, effect modes 1 to 6 are mainly provided as effect modes.

  As shown in FIG. 9, at the start of a game, in many cases, the game state is a normal game state (non-probability change state / non-time reduction (non-electric support) state). In the normal gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 1 is performed as the effect mode (step S900). The transition from the normal gaming state to another gaming state is mainly triggered by the result of the hit determination by the starting winning of the first starting port 5442. Exceptionally, for example, when there is a hold of the variable display of the second special symbol when 100 power support states are completed, for example, the hit determination of the second special symbol is the maximum number of hold times in the normal gaming state. When the upper limit is set to four times and the result of the determination results in some big hit, the power support state is entered. However, since this is a rare case, it is omitted from this drawing. It should be noted that, since the power support state has been completed for the above four times, it is possible to return to the power support state if a big hit is made at that time. While performing the hit determination, the player may have a sense of expectation as a special production mode different from the production mode 1.

  In the normal gaming state, the big hit determination is performed by starting winning of the first starting port 5442 by so-called left-handed. In addition, when the result of the big hit determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 becomes a big hit and the gaming state shifts to the short time (electric support) state, so-called right-handed is performed. In this way, while the short time (electric support) state continues, the big hit determination is performed by the start winning of the second start port 440. In addition, although the result of the big hit determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 becomes a big hit, when the gaming state does not shift to the short-time (electric support) state (the gaming state is non-short-time (non-electric support) state Left-handed).

  When the gaming state shown in step S900 is in a non-probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the production in the production mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit judgment (win judgment) is a special figure (1) big hit When -1, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the probability variation state / short time (electric support) state. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 1 is ended, and the effect in the effect mode 2 is started (steps S901 and S902). In the gaming state in which the effect in the effect mode 2 is performed, the ST number is set to 100 times, and the time reduction number is set to 50 times.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is a probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit− When it becomes any one of 1 to 3, the gaming state shifts to a probability variation state / short time (electric support) state (steps S910, S911). That is, the gaming state after the transition is the same as the gaming state before the transition. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 2 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 3 is started. Note that, in the gaming state in which the effect in the effect mode 3 is performed, the ST number is set to 100 times, and the time reduction number is set to continue during the probability changing state (up to 100 times).

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is in the probabilistic state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit − When any of 1 to 3 is reached, the gaming state shifts again to the probability variation state / short time (electric support) state (steps S912 and S911). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 3 is continued. Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the ST number and the short time number counted until the big hit is cleared. That is, the ST number and the time reduction number are counted from 0.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is in the probabilistic state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit − When any of 4 to 6 is reached, the gaming state shifts to a non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state described later (steps S913 and S921). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 3 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 4 is started.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is a probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (win determination) is determined (open twice ( In 1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (100 times), the ST (probability variation state) and the short-time state end, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. (Steps S914, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the production in the production mode 3 is finished, and the production in the production mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and the short time number are cleared. The count is not restarted (steps S914 and S915; No). That is, the production in the production mode 3 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is in the probabilistic state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (win determination) is lost. The gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (100 times), the ST (probability change state) and the short-time state end, so the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. (Steps S916, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the production in the production mode 3 is finished, and the production in the production mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and the short time number are cleared. The count is not restarted (steps S916, S915; No). That is, the production in the production mode 3 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is a probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit− If it becomes any of 4 to 6, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state (steps S920 and S921). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 2 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 4 is started. In the gaming state in which the effect of the effect mode 4 is performed, the number of time reductions is set to 100 times.

  Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is the non-probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the production mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit −1 If it becomes any of 3 from 3, the gaming state shifts to a probability variation state / short time (electric support) state (steps S922 and S911). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 4 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 3 is started. Along with this transition of the gaming state, the short time count counted until the big hit is cleared.

  Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is the non-probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit -4 If it becomes any of 6 from 6, the game state will again shift to the non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state (steps S923, S921). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 4 is continued. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the short time count counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is in the uncertain change state / short time (electric support) state and the production mode 4 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (win determination) is determined (open twice (1 ) And (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (100 times), the short-time state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S924, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect in effect mode 4 ends and the effect in effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the short time number is not cleared. The count is restarted (steps S924, S925; No). That is, the effect in effect mode 4 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is an uncertain change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 4 is performed, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (win determination) are lost. Then, the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (100 times), the time reduction state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S926, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect in effect mode 4 ends and the effect in effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the short time number is not cleared. The count is restarted (steps S926, S925; No). That is, the effect in effect mode 4 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is a probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (the hit determination) is determined (open twice ( In 1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), the ST (probability variation state) continues, while the time reduction state ends, so the probability variation state / non-time reduction ( The gaming state shifts to the (non-electric support) state (steps S930, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the production in the production mode 2 is finished, and the production in the production mode 5 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and the short time number are cleared. The count is restarted (steps S930, S931; No). That is, the effect in effect mode 2 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is in the probabilistic state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (win determination) is lost. The gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (50 times), the ST (probability variation state) continues, while the time reduction state ends, so the probability variation state / non-time reduction ( The gaming state shifts to the (non-electric support) state (steps S932, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the production in the production mode 2 is finished, and the production in the production mode 5 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / short time (electric support)) is maintained, and the ST number and the short time number are cleared. The count is restarted (steps S932, S931; No). That is, the effect in effect mode 2 is continued.

  As described above, when the production in the production mode 2 is finished and the production in the production mode 5 is started, the ST (probability variation state) continues, while the time reduction (electric support) state is finished. That is, the player makes a left strike instead of a right strike. In the present embodiment, the effect in effect mode 5 is set to the same content as the effect in effect mode 1. Thus, when the production of the production mode 5 is started, the player enters a gaming state (latent probability variation state) in which it is difficult to recognize that the ST (probability variation state) is continuing. The production in the production mode 5 may have the same content as the production in the production mode 1, and may be performed by notifying the player that the latent probability changing state has been determined.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is the special figure (1). When either the big hit -1 or 2 is reached, the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state / short time (electric support) state (steps S934, S911). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 5 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 3 is started. Along with the transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is the special figure (1). When the big hit is -3, the gaming state shifts again to the probability variation state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state (steps S935 and S933). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 5 is continued. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the ST number counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is the special figure (1). When the big hit is -4 or 5, the gaming state shifts to a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state (that is, a normal gaming state) (steps S936 and S900). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 5 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 1 is started. Along with the transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is the special figure (1). When the big hit is -6, the gaming state shifts to a non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state (steps S937 and S951). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 5 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 6 is started. Along with the transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a certain change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the production in the production mode 5 is performed, The gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number, ST (probability change state) ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S938, S939; Yes). , S900). That is, the production in the production mode 5 is finished, and the production in the production mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number, the current gaming state (probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state) is maintained, the ST number is not cleared, and the count is The process is resumed (steps S938, S939; No). That is, the production in the production mode 5 is continued.

  Note that the predetermined number of times in step S939 is set according to what the presentation of the presentation mode 5 currently being started is triggered. Specifically, when the production of the production mode 5 currently being performed is triggered by the number of hit determinations being 50 after the production of the production of the production mode 2 is started (step S931; Yes). ), The predetermined number of times in step S939 is 50 (from the start of the effect in effect mode 5). On the other hand, the currently performed effect in the effect mode 5 is the special figure (1) big hit -2 or 3 shown in step S960, or the special figure (1) big hit -3 shown in step S935. Is started as a trigger, the predetermined number of times in step S939 is 100 (from the start of the effect in effect mode 5).

  Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the big hit is -6, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the non-probable change state / short time (electric support) state. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 1 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 6 is started (steps S950 and S951). In the gaming state in which the effect in the effect mode 6 is performed, the number of time reductions is set to 50.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is in the uncertain change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit When it becomes any one of -1 to 3, the gaming state shifts to a probability change state / short time (electric support) state (steps S952 and S911). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 6 ends and the effect in the effect mode 3 is started. Along with this transition of the gaming state, the short time count counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is in the uncertain change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit When any of -4 to 6 is reached, the gaming state shifts to a non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state (steps S953 and S921). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 6 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 4 is started. Along with this transition of the gaming state, the short time count counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is in the uncertain change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (win determination) is determined (opened twice). In (1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), the time-short state is completed, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S954, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect in effect mode 6 ends and the effect in effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the short time number is not cleared. The count is restarted (steps S954, S955; No). That is, the production in the production mode 6 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is the non-probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 6 is performed, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (win determination) are lost. Then, the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (50 times), the time reduction state ends, so the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S956, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect in effect mode 6 ends and the effect in effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / short time (electric support)) is maintained, the short time number is not cleared, Counting is resumed (steps S956, S955; No).

  Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the big hit is -2 or 3, the gaming state shifts to the probability variation state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state (steps S960, S933). That is, the production in the production mode 1 is finished, and the production in the production mode 5 is started.

  Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the big hit is -4 or 5, the game state shifts to the normal game state again. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 1 is continued (steps S970 and S900).

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probable change state / non-time-saving (non-electric support) state and the production of the production mode 1 is performed, if the result of the big hit judgment (hit judgment) is lost, The normal gaming state is maintained. That is, the effect in effect mode 1 is continued (steps S980 and S900).

  In such a game flow, when the production mode 2 is started (step S902), the ST state is set to 100 times by shifting the game state to the probability change state / short time (electric support) state. The Similarly, when the effect mode 3 is started (step S911), the ST state is set to 100 times when the gaming state shifts to the probability variation state / short time (electric support) state. Thus, after the production mode 2 or 3 is started (that is, after ST is started), for example, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the current gaming state is maintained (in principle) after the small hit game ends. , ST count is not cleared and counting is resumed. In this way, the effect in the effect mode 2 or 3 is continued.

  Here, as described above, when the small hit game is started, the big winning opening 540 is opened twice so that one game ball is won per opening. In other words, when the production mode 2 or 3 is started (when ST is started), for example, the number of hit determinations is a predetermined number of times until the production mode ends (until the ST ends). In the meantime, the small hit game can be repeated. In this way, when the small hit game is repeatedly performed, a prize ball can be obtained by the small hit game, and the number of game balls at hand of the player can be increased.

  In the following, an ST in which a prize ball is obtained by a small hit game and the number of game balls in the player's hand can be increased is referred to as a super-probability change state. In addition, a game in which a winning ball is obtained by a small hit game after entering the super-probability change state and the number of game balls in the player's hand is increased is referred to as rush (RUSH). That is, the rush (per time) continues from the big hit that triggered the transition to the super-probable change state until the next big hit or the end of the short-time state. As described above, in the present embodiment, a game in which the short-time state ends (for example, a game of 100 hits or 50 hits described later) is a rush end condition.

  In addition, after the production mode 2 is started, when the production mode 3 is started by any one of the special figures (2) jackpot -1 to 3, the game state before and after the jackpot is in a highly probable state. For this reason, it is assumed that the super-probable variation state continues. In such a case, it is assumed that the rush is continuously performed (the second rush is performed).

  Moreover, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a super-probable change state is set, a payout display regarding the acquired payroll is performed. The detailed explanation about the above-mentioned payout display will be described later.

[Description of main control circuit operation]
Hereinafter, processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described.

[Main processing]
First, a main process performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S10, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process. In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs backup restoration processing, initialization setting processing, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11.

  In step S11, the main CPU 101 performs a random value update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random value counter, the rendering condition selection random value counter, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S12.

  In step S12, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates various timers such as a timer for synchronizing the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 and an opening time timer for the big prize opening 540. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S13.

  In step S13, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process. In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit determination result is a win according to the detection signal from the first start port switch 5472 or the second start port switch 441, and stores the determination result in the main RAM 103. The processing to do is performed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S14. Details of this process will be described later.

  In step S14, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a win according to the detection signal from the passing gate switch 49 a, and performs a process of storing the determination result in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S15.

  In step S15, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 according to the determination result of the hit determination and the normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 in the processes in step S13 and step S14. Then, a process of storing a control signal for driving the normal symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. The main CPU 101 transmits the stored control signal to the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 and the normal symbol display unit 71. Thus, the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 performs variable display and stop display of the special symbol based on the received control signal. Moreover, the normal symbol display part 71 carries out the variable display and stop display of a normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S16.

  In step S16, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs game information to an external device (for example, the calling device or the hall computer). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S17.

  In step S17, the main CPU 101 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for driving the special winning opening 540 (shutter 610) and the second start opening 440 (ordinary electric accessory 460). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S18.

  In step S18, the main CPU 101 performs command output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S19.

  In step S19, the main CPU 101 performs payout processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 plays game balls at various winning ports (specifically, the big winning port 540, the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 440, and the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, 56). It is determined whether or not has won a prize. When the main CPU 101 determines that the game ball has won at various winning ports, the main CPU 101 transmits a payout request command corresponding to the win to the payout / launch control circuit 300. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11 again and repeats the process from step S11 to step S19.

[System timer interrupt processing]
Hereinafter, a system timer interrupt process performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG. The system timer interrupt process is performed by interrupting the main process at predetermined intervals even when the main process is being performed.

  In step S20, the main CPU 101 performs a register saving process. In this process, the main CPU 101 saves the running program stored in the register. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S21.

  In step S21, the main CPU 101 performs a random value update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the jackpot determination random number counter, the jackpot symbol determination random value counter, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S22.

  In step S22, the main CPU 101 performs switch input processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 uses various switches (specifically, the first start port switch 5472, the second start port switch 441, the passage gate switch 49a, the count switch 541, and the general winning port switches 53a, 54a, and 55a). -Whether or not a signal is input to 56a or the like (that is, whether or not game balls are detected in various switches) is determined. The main CPU 101 transmits a command to the sub-control circuit 200 when it is determined that a game ball has been detected at any of the various switches (when a game ball has won at any of the various winning ports). . For example, when the count switch 541 counts (detects) a game ball, the main CPU 101 transmits a big prize opening prize command to the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S23. Details of this process will be described later.

  In step S23, the main CPU 101 performs a register return process. In this process, the main CPU 101 restores the saved program to the register. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol control processing]
Below, the subroutine (special symbol control process) performed in step S13 of FIG. 11 is demonstrated using FIG. In FIG. 13, the numerical values written on the sides of step S <b> 101 to step S <b> 108 indicate control state flags corresponding to these steps. Here, the control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and enables one of the processes in steps S101 to S108 to be executed. The numerical value is stored in a storage area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 103.

  In step S100, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S101.

  In step S101 to step S108, which will be described later, the main CPU 101 executes a step corresponding to the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. More specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform the process in each step based on the value of the control state flag, and determines each process at a predetermined timing set for each step according to the determination result. Process in steps. As a result, the specific symbol game proceeds. The predetermined timing is determined according to a waiting time timer or the like. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine without performing the processing in each step, and performs another subroutine. The main CPU 101 also performs a system timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 at predetermined intervals, separately from this subroutine.

  In step S101, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S102.

  In step S102, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation time management processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management to the control state flag when the control state flag is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management and the variation time has elapsed. And a waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 performs setting so that the process of step S103 is performed after a waiting time after determination has elapsed. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S103.

  In step S103, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management and the waiting time after determination has passed, the main CPU 101 receives a hit determination result (big hit or small hit). It is determined whether or not. When the result of the hit determination is win, the main CPU 101 sets a value (03H) indicating hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S104 after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the result of the hit determination is a loss. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to execute the process of step S108. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S104.

  In step S104, the main CPU 101 performs a hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a signal to open the special winning opening 540 when the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management and the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. , And supply to the grand prize opening solenoid 620. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs opening / closing control of the special winning opening 540.

  Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open to the control state flag, and sets the upper opening limit time (for example, about 0.1 seconds or about 30 seconds) to the special winning opening opening time timer. Set to. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S105. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S105.

  In step S105, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening reopening waiting time management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the special winning opening opening number counter when the control status flag is a value (05H) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. The memory is updated so that “1” is increased. The main CPU 101 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 0.1 second or about 30 seconds) in the big prize opening time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S106. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S106.

  In step S106, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control status flag is a value (04H) indicating that the big prize opening is being opened, the main CPU 101 has passed the condition that the big prize opening prize counter is “10” or more, and the opening upper limit time ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the big winning opening opening time timer is “0” is satisfied. The main CPU 101 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the special winning opening 540 when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not a condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening open number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 101 sets a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval in the control state flag when it is the final round, while setting a value (05H) indicating the big winning opening reopening waiting time management when it is not the final round. Set to control status flag. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S107.

  In step S107, the main CPU 101 performs a hit end interval process. In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set the status flag. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S108. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S108.

  In step S108, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process. In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S101. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  As described above, when the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag, the special symbol game is advanced. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “07H” when the hit determination result is lost in the case of not being in the big hit or small hit gaming state. By setting in order, the processing of step S101, step S102, step S103, and step S108 shown in FIG. 13 is performed at a predetermined timing. When the main CPU 101 is not in the big hit or small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is big hit or small hit, the control state flag is set to “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “03H”. By setting them in order, the processing of step S101, step S102, step S103, and step S104 shown in FIG. 13 is performed at a predetermined timing to control to the big hit or small hit gaming state. Further, when the control to the big hit or the small hit gaming state is performed, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag in order of “04H” and “05H”, thereby performing steps S105 and S106 shown in FIG. The big hit or the small hit game is performed at the predetermined timing. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag in the order of “04H”, “06H”, and “07H” when the big hit or small hit game end condition is satisfied, so that step S105 shown in FIG. The processing of step S107 and step S108 is performed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit or small hit game is ended.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
Hereinafter, a subroutine (special symbol storage check process) performed in step S101 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. If the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol storage check, it moves the process to step S111. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 111, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining the presence or absence of start memory. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no special symbol game start memory, that is, from the first special symbol start memory area (0) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) or the second special symbol start memory. If no data (a random number for hit determination) is stored from the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to step S112. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that there is a start memory (more specifically, a start memory corresponding to at least one of the first and second special symbols), the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S112, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 sets a value that permits execution of the demonstration display as the demonstration display permission value when the state in which the special symbol game start-up memory is 0 is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Then, the main CPU 101 sets a demonstration display command when the demonstration display permission value is a predetermined value. The demonstration display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. Thereby, the demonstration display is performed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  In step S113, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is zero. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is data in the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol start storage area is zero. That is, if it is determined that no data is stored from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to step S115. On the other hand, in the main CPU 101, the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not 0, that is, data is stored from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S114.

  In step S <b> 114, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (02H) indicating the variation of the second special symbol as a variation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

  In step S <b> 115, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01 </ b> H) indicating the variation of the first special symbol as a variation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

  In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S117.

  In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol memory transfer processing. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 101 transfers each of the data from the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). A process of shifting (storing) from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. When the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 uses the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) for the second special symbol. A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S118.

  In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the high probability flag, and selects one hit determination table from a plurality of hit determination tables having different numbers of determination values (hit determination values) that are big hits based on the read high probability flag. To do. That is, when the high probability flag has a predetermined value, the high probability hit (big hit) determination table with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the high probability flag is not the predetermined value, the big hit determination A normal hit (big hit) determination table with a small value is referred to. Thus, when the high probability flag is a predetermined value, that is, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state), the probability of shifting to the big hit gaming state is improved as compared with the normal time.

  Then, the main CPU 101 extracts a random number value for the hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously extracted in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). And the selected hit determination table. Then, the main CPU 101 determines that it is a big hit when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (is lost) when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value do not match. In this way, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player (big hit determination) in the big hit determination processing. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S119.

  In step S119, the main CPU 101 performs a small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is performed when the big hit determination process in step S118 is not a big hit. In this process, the main CPU 101 pre-sets the hit determination random number value of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). It is determined whether or not the determination value for the small hit matches. Then, the main CPU 101 determines that it is a small hit when the hit determination random number value matches the small hit determination value. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines that there is no small hit (lost) when the hit determination random number value does not match the small hit determination value. In this way, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to enter the small hit gaming state (small hit determination) in the small hit determination process.

  In this embodiment, two types of normal determination and high probability (probability variation) are prepared as a hit determination random number stored in the first special symbol start storage area and a hit determination table to be referenced. There are two types of hit determination tables, one for normal use and one for high probability (for probability variation), as a hit determination table to be referenced with the random number value for hit determination stored in the second special symbol start storage area. A table is provided. Note that the two types of normal hit determination tables have the same big hit probability, and the two types of high hit determination tables have the same big hit probability. On the other hand, the number of small hit determination values in the normal hit determination table and the high probability (probability change) hit determination table, which are referred to the hit determination random number value stored in the first special symbol start storage area. Are the same. In addition, the number of small hit determination values in the normal hit determination table and the high probability (probability change) hit determination table referred to the hit determination random number value stored in the second special symbol start storage area is the same. It is. As described above, the main CPU 101 can obtain a larger number of game balls than the normal game state on the condition that the game balls have passed the start area (first start port 5442, second start port 440). 1 hit game state, second hit game state where a small amount of game balls can be obtained compared to the first hit game state, and third hit where a game ball equivalent to the second hit game state can be obtained It is an example of the hit determination means for determining whether to shift to the gaming state.

  Note that the small hit probability due to winning at the first start port 5442 of the normal game may be larger or smaller than the small hit probability due to winning at the second start port 440. The big hit probability due to winning in the first start opening 5442 of the normal game may be larger or smaller than the big hit probability due to winning in the second start opening 440.

  As described above, the process of steps S118 and S119 determines one of big hit, small hit, and loss as a result of the hit determination for the special symbol game. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S120.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a big hit symbol when the hit determination result is a big hit, determines a small hit symbol when the hit determination result is a small hit, and if neither the big hit nor the small hit is obtained, That is, in the case of losing, the losing symbol is determined. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S121.

  In step S121, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a variation pattern for determining a special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the processing of step S120 and the result of the hit determination determined in the processing of steps S118 and S119. Select a table. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (selects) the variation pattern based on the rendering condition determination random number extracted from the rendering condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table. The main CPU 101 stores the selected variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the data indicating such a variation pattern.

  The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. As a result, the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 with the determined variation pattern. Further, the data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special figure variation pattern designation command. Thereby, the effect display according to the received special figure fluctuation pattern designation | designated command is performed by control of the sub control circuit 200. FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S122.

  In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation time setting processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern in the waiting time timer. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S123.

  In step S <b> 123, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 103. The special symbol effect start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. The sub control circuit 200 starts an effect based on the received special symbol effect start command. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S124.

  In step S124, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current variation display. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol determination processing]
Hereinafter, a subroutine (special symbol determination process) performed in step S120 in FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S150, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S151. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S156.

  In step S151, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether or not the variation state number is (01H). If the main CPU 101 determines that the variation state number is (01H), it moves the process to step S152. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the variation state number is not (01H), the process proceeds to step S154.

  In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol based on the jackpot symbol determining random value extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S153.

  In step S153, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol command. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the big special symbol data of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 73. The first special symbol display unit 73 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays the first special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a big hit symbol command of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the big hit stop display mode under the control of the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

  In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol based on the jackpot symbol determining random value extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S155.

  In step S155, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the big special symbol data of the second special symbol and the big special symbol command. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the big special symbol data of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 74. The second special symbol display unit 74 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the second special symbol. Also, the main CPU 101 sets the big special symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the big hit stop display mode under the control of the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

  In step S156, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S160. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not the small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S164.

  In step S160, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol based on the random number value extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S161.

  In step S161, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting data for a small hit symbol of the second special symbol and a command for the small hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the small hit symbol data of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 74. The second special symbol display unit 74 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the small hit symbol data of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the small special symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. . As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the small hit stop display mode under the control of the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

  In step S162, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting hit start interval display time data corresponding to the winning symbol (big winning symbol, small winning symbol). In this process, the main CPU 101 hits a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and sets hit start interval display time data corresponding to a symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol) in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S163.

  In step S <b> 163, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting data related to the number of times of winning a prize opening. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the big prize opening number related data in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  In step S <b> 164, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting data for a lost symbol and a command for a lost symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the lost symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and the first special symbol display unit according to whether the changing special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. The first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the special symbol in a manner based on the loss symbol data of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a lost symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in a loss stop display mode under the control of the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol change time management processing]
Hereinafter, a subroutine (special symbol variation time management process) performed in step S102 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S200, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management, the process proceeds to step S201. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S202. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S202, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management as a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S203.

  In step S203, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command data is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S204.

  In step S204, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a waiting time timer as a waiting time after determination. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the post-confirmation waiting time in an area that functions as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol display time management process]
Hereinafter, a subroutine (special symbol display time management process) performed in step S103 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S301, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S302. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S304.

  In step S302, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S303. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 303, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the game state flag in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  In step S304, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S311. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S <b> 305, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time reduction counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. If the main CPU 101 determines that the hourly number counter is “0”, it moves the process to step S325. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S306.

  In step S <b> 306, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S307.

  In step S <b> 307, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time reduction counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. If the main CPU 101 determines that the hourly number counter is “0”, it moves the process to step S308. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is not “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S325.

  In step S <b> 308, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the time count flag in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S309.

  In step S <b> 309, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a time reduction end command in the main RAM 103. The short time end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the end of the short time. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S325.

  In step S325, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST number counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When determining that the ST number counter is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S310. On the other hand, when determining that the ST number counter is not “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S326.

  In step S326, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the ST number counter in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S327.

  In step S327, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST number counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When determining that the ST number counter is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S328. On the other hand, when determining that the ST number counter is not “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S310.

  In step S328, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the ST number flag in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S329.

  In step S329, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting an ST end command in the main RAM 103. The ST end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the end of ST. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S310.

  In step S310, the main CPU 101 performs processing to determine whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S311. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not the small hit, the process proceeds to step S315.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S312.

  In step S312, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer as a hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the hit start interval time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S313. In addition, although the hit start interval time is determined for each hit type, in this embodiment, at least the special probability change, the special normal, the real output small probability change, the real output small normal and the special figure (2) small hit -2 The hitting start interval time is set to be the same or a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 1 second).

  In step S313, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol effect stop. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process of step S314.

  In step S314, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a big hit start command or a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol. The big hit start command or the small hit start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the start of big hit or small hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  In step S315, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game end process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S316.

  In step S316, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol effect stop. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Period start interval management processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (the hit start interval management process) performed in step S104 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S401, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S402. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S402, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S403. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 403, the main CPU 101 sets the special winning opening opening number counter upper limit value of the main RAM 103.

  In step S <b> 404, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special winning opening opening number counter in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S405.

  In step S405, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting an opening / closing pattern for each round or for a small hit according to the type of the big hit symbol. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S406.

  In step S <b> 406, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this case, the special winning opening open display command is data indicating the first round. The special prize opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special prize opening opening command. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S407.

  In step S407, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening reopening waiting time management process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S408.

  In step S <b> 408, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S409.

  In step S <b> 409, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value of a waiting time timer as a special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S410.

  In step S <b> 410, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to open the special winning opening 540. The variables stored in this way will drive the special prize opening solenoid 620 to open the special prize opening 540. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Large winning opening reopening waiting time management process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (large winning opening reopening waiting time management process) performed in step S105 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating a special winning opening reopening waiting time management process. If the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S501. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (05H) indicating the big winning opening reopening waiting time management process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S501, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. If the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S502. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 502, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special winning opening opening number counter in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S503.

  In step S <b> 503, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this case, the display command for opening the special winning opening is data indicating the second and subsequent rounds. The display command data during the big prize opening opening is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. The special winning opening open display command includes an instruction to the sub CPU 201 to perform round counter +1. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S504.

  In step S504, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S505.

  In step S505, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S506. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S507.

  In step S <b> 506, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S507.

  In step S <b> 507, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S508.

  In step S <b> 508, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the big prize opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Large winning opening process]
In the following, the subroutine (big prize opening process) performed in step S106 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S600, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process. In this process, if the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the big prize opening process, the process proceeds to step S601. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 601, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the grand prize winning prize counter is “10” or more. In this process, if the main CPU 101 determines that the big prize opening winning counter is “10” or more, it moves the process to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the grand prize winning prize counter is not “10” or more, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S602.

  In step S <b> 602, the main CPU 101 performs a big prize opening / closing process according to the set round / small opening / closing pattern. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of opening / closing the special winning opening 540 according to the opening / closing pattern for each round or small hit set in step S405. Specifically, the process of opening and closing the special prize opening 540 a plurality of times during a predetermined round by repeating the process of closing and opening the special prize opening 540 after waiting for time in accordance with the opening / closing pattern for each round or small hit I do. If this process ends, the process moves to a step S603.

  Here, in this embodiment, special probability change, special normal interval time between the first opening of the first round and the second opening, special figure (2) small opening -2 of the first opening and the second opening The interval time between the releases is set to the same or a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 0.1 seconds). That is, in the process of step S602, the special probability change, special normal, special figure (2) small hit -2 is “0.896 seconds open time → 0.1 second open interval time → 0.896 second open time”. It will be executed in the order of “time”. In addition, although not processed in this step, it is set in step S607, but the interval time between the rounds of the first round and the second round of the actual first and second rounds is also the same or By setting a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 0.1 seconds), the opening time of the first round of 0.896 seconds → interval time between rounds of 0.1 seconds → two rounds of 0.896 seconds It is executed in the order of “opening time of eyes”. Thereby, even if it is based on the time when the special winning opening 540 is closed, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the hit type.

  In step S <b> 603, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer as the big prize opening time timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 604, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the big prize opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to close the special winning opening 540. The variables stored in this way will close the special prize opening solenoid 620. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S605.

  In step S605, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S610. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not the small hit, the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S <b> 606, the main CPU 101 performs processing to determine whether or not the special winning opening opening count value is equal to or greater than the special winning opening open count upper limit. In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the large winning opening opening count value stored in the main RAM 103 with the upper winning opening opening count upper limit value or more, and the main winning opening opening count value is determined as the large winning opening opening count. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value is exceeded. If the main CPU 101 determines that the winning opening opening count value is equal to or greater than the winning opening opening upper limit, the process proceeds to step S610. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the large winning opening opening count value is not greater than or equal to the winning opening opening count upper limit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S607.

  In step S <b> 607, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time interval display time in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S608.

  In step S608, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S609.

  In step S <b> 609, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  In step S <b> 610, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S611.

  In step S611, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S612.

  In step S <b> 612, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting an interval end display command per special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, when the hit determination result is a big hit, a big hit end display command is set, and when the hit determination result is a small hit, a small hit end display command is set. The big hit end display command and the small hit end display command are supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Hit end interval processing]
In the following, the subroutine (hit end interval process) executed in step S107 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S700, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the hit end interval process (06H), the process proceeds to step S701. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the hit end interval process (06H), this subroutine ends.

  In step S701, when the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value indicating the hit end interval process (06H), the main CPU 101 sets the value of the waiting time timer (t) corresponding to the hit end interval to “0”. It is determined whether or not. Further, when the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S702, and when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S702, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 103 in the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to a step S703.

  In step S <b> 703, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting control data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol and the gaming state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, a game state such as a normal game state or a probability change state is set as control data. Further, the main CPU 101 sends an end command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Special symbol game end processing]
Hereinafter, a subroutine (special symbol game end process) executed in step S108 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S710, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game end process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the process proceeds to step S711. When it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, this subroutine is ended.

  In step S711, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 103 as a control state flag. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Description of sub-control circuit operation]
Hereinafter, processing of the sub control circuit 200 will be described. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100, and the sub CPU 201 performs various processes such as a display process.

[Sub control main processing]
First, the sub control main process performed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1101, the sub CPU 201 performs an initialization process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 initializes the work area of the work RAM 203 in response to power-on. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1102.

  In step S1102, the sub CPU 201 performs a random value update process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates random number values stored in the work RAM 203 (for example, effect determination random value, jackpot effect determination random value, stop symbol determination random value, etc.). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1103.

  In step S1103, the sub CPU 201 performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 203. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1104.

  In step S1104, the sub CPU 201 performs effect control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the effect using the effect button 62. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1105.

  In step S1105, the sub CPU 201 performs display control processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for displaying on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to the display control circuit 204. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1106.

  In the display control circuit 204, when data is received from the sub CPU 201, the VDP of the display control circuit 204 performs various kinds of data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and production image data based on the received data. Are read from the image data ROM. The VDP superimposes various image data read from the image data ROM and displays them on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  In step S1106, the sub CPU 201 performs sound / lamp control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs control of sound generated from the speaker 24 and light emission control of various lamps such as the lamp 25. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1107.

  In step S1107, the sub CPU 201 performs an accessory control process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the operation (mechanical operation or lighting operation) of each of the objects 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400 via the object control circuit 207. When the sub CPU 201 finishes the control processing of the operations of the respective accessories 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, and 1400, the processing is transferred again to the random value update processing in step S1102.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Even when the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 24 is being performed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and a timer interrupt process may be performed. Hereinafter, a timer interrupt process performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1201, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves values used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1202.

  In step S1202, the sub CPU 201 performs timer update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the timer stored in the work RAM 203. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 updates a timer such as a round effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1203.

  In step S1203, the sub CPU 201 performs an effect button switch input detection process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 detects whether or not the effect button switch 310 is input by operating the effect button 62. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1204.

  In step S1204, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the value saved in step S201 to each register. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command interrupt processing]
Even when the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 24 is being executed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and a command interrupt process may be performed. Hereinafter, command interrupt processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves values used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for storing the received command in the buffer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1303.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the value saved in step S1301 to each register. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command analysis processing]
Hereinafter, a subroutine (command analysis process) performed in step S1103 in FIG. 23 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In step S1401, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a received command, it moves the process to step S1402. On the other hand, when determining that there is no reception command, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1402, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for reading the received command. In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads a command stored in the reception buffer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1403.

  In step S1403, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is a big prize winning command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a big prize opening prize command, it moves the process to step S1404. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a big prize opening prize command, it moves the process to step S1405.

  In step S <b> 1404, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the big hit winning number counter and the total winning number counter. In this way, the sub CPU 201 can acquire data relating to the number of winning balls (the number of acquired gaming balls) acquired by the player due to the winning of a gaming ball in the special winning opening 540. Note that the big win winning number counter and the total winning number counter start counting (counting) with the start of the big hit game as a break. Thus, each time a big hit or a small hit is made, data relating to the number of winning balls is acquired. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1405, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a special symbol designation command, it moves the process to step S1406. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a special symbol designation command, it moves the process to step S1407.

  In step S1406, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a stop symbol based on the special symbol designation command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1407, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1408. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a special figure variation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1409.

  In step S1408, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern designation command, the stop symbol, and the extracted effect determination random number. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1409, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command). In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command), the process proceeds to step S1410. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command), the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1411.

  In step S1410, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a big hit start effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1411, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a special winning opening opening effect display command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a bonus opening opening effect display command, the process proceeds to step S1412. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not an effect display command during opening of the big prize opening, the process proceeds to step S1413.

  In step S <b> 1412, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect during the opening of the special winning opening. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1413, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a round display command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is an inter-round display command, it moves the process to step S1414. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not an inter-round display command, it moves the process to step S1415.

  In step S <b> 1414, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining effects between rounds. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1415, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is a hit end display command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a hit end display command, it moves the process to step S1416. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a hit end display command, it moves the process to step S1417.

  In step S1416, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect at the end of the big hit. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S <b> 1417, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a time reduction end command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a time reduction end command, it moves the process to step S1418. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a time saving end command, it moves the process to step S1419.

  In step S <b> 1418, the sub CPU 201 performs control such as clearing the short time flag and ending the short time display. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1419, the sub CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to the received other command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Flow of game balls]
Below, the flow of the game ball launched toward the game area 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29 is an example of a diagram illustrating a state in which the game ball flows down the right region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened. FIG. 30 is an example of a diagram illustrating a manner in which the game ball flows down the right region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed. FIG. 31 is an example of a diagram illustrating a manner in which the game ball flows down the left region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened.

  As described above, the attacker unit 500 is disposed in the lower right portion of the gaming area 20 and below the passing gate 49. Therefore, in the big hit gaming state, so-called right-handed is performed. When the big winning opening 540 is in the open state by the shutter 610, the game ball that has been hit to the right is likely to win the big winning opening 540. Moreover, even if it is not a big hit game state, right-handed is performed also during electric support.

  However, when the player hits the right side, the game ball that has flowed down the right region loses his sense of expectation when he does not win the big prize opening 540 and just waits to flow into the outlet 57 as it is. End up. Therefore, when the right-handed game ball does not win the big prize opening 540, the player feels disadvantageous and causes a decrease in interest. In particular, in recent years, the liquid crystal display device 16 has been required to be enlarged, and there are currently limited places where the attacker unit 500 and the like can be placed in the game area 20. Therefore, in order to meet the demand for an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device 16, the attacker unit 500 has to be disposed below the gaming area 20 as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. When the attacker unit 500 is arranged in the lower part of the game area 20, it becomes more prominent that the right-handed game ball flows into the out port 57 as long as it does not win the big winning port 540.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is disposed substantially at the lower left portion of the game area 20. In addition, the attacker unit 500 includes a game ball guiding member 580. This game ball guiding member 580 is a right-handed (flowing down the right area) and game ball that has not won the big prize opening 540, including the guide nail 700, in the game area 20 where the out mouth 57 is arranged. A member that leads to the upstream of the blade member 4620 disposed in the left region beyond the center, and that forms a path of the game ball that is extended on the extension line of the big prize opening 540 toward the flow-down direction of the game ball It is. Here, “upstream of the blade member 4620” is an area in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 440 if the blade member 4620 is open (hereinafter referred to as “second starting port receiving” in this specification). Area). The second start port receiving area is, for example, a peripheral area of the game ball 223 located above the blade member 4620 in FIG.

  The game area 20 is a game ball guiding member that serves as a flow path for a game ball that is right-handed (flows down the right area) and reaches the exit side of the big prize opening 540 without winning the big prize opening 540. A flow-down path connecting the exit side portion of 580 and the out port 57 is formed by the guide nail 700. The game ball flowing down this flow path always passes through the second start port receiving area before reaching the out port 57.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the normal symbol determination shifts to the high probability state when the big hit gaming state ends, so that the electric support state is in the short-time state, and the blade member 4620 is frequently used. Opened.

  As shown in FIG. 29, when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened, if the game ball that has been hit right (flowed down the right side area) does not win the big prize opening 540, the game The ball is always guided by the game ball guiding member 580 and the guide nail 700 to the second start port receiving area upstream of the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460.

  Of the game balls that have been hit right (flowed down the right area), the game balls that have not won the big prize opening 540 are always guided to the second start opening receiving area upstream of the blade member 4620. If the wing member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened when the game ball is guided to the start port receiving area, it is received by the wing member 4620 without flowing into the out port 57, and the second start port 440 is received. The chance of winning a prize is increasing. That is, when the blade member 4620 is closed, the out port 57 is at the most downstream position of the game area 20 as described above, but when the blade member 4620 is open, the second port is replaced with the out port 57. The start port 440 is the most downstream position. Thus, the blade member 4620 has a function of changing the most downstream position in the game area 20.

  In this way, even if a game ball that has been hit right (flowed down the right side area) does not win the big prize opening 540, the game ball must always reach the second start port reception area (upstream of the blade member 4620). Since it is led, the expectation to win the second start opening 440 continues, and the interest can be enhanced.

  In particular, right-handed is performed in the electric support state. For this reason, the prize winning port 540 is not opened during the electric support, but the most downstream position is changed from the out port 57 to the second start port 440 by the blade member 4620, so that the game progresses in the electric support state. It is promoted and can be interesting.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 30, when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed, the game balls that have been hit right (flowing down the right side area) and have not won the big prize opening 540 Although it is always guided to the upstream side of the blade member 4620, it flows into the out port 57 through between the blade member 4620 and the guide nail 700 (that is, the left side of the guide nail 700).

  Of the game balls that have been hit to the right (flowed down the right area), the game balls that have not reached the big prize opening 540 (for example, the game balls that have flowed down the down flow passage from the right side of the general prize opening 56 to the out port 57). ) May be configured to be guided to the out port 57. At this time, among the right-handed game balls, the game balls that did not win the big prize opening 540, but did not win the game balls that reached the big prize opening 540, but did not reach the big prize opening 540 There are game balls that have not been won, but either game ball may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620, or only one of the game balls may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620. .

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 31, the left-handed game ball (game ball that has flowed down the left region) generally wins the first start port 5442 or the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, It flows into the outlet 57 or the outlet 450. After the game ball is left-handed, the game ball 224 rolling on the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 continues to have a winning expectation at the first start port 5442, but toward the first start port 5442. With respect to the game balls 2226 that have been removed from the flow path 222 and have not won the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, the first starting opening in the conventional pachinko machine (corresponding to the first starting opening 5442 in the present embodiment). The expectation of winning a prize will be lost. Further, even if the game ball 224 rolls in the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442, if the first start port 5442 is not won, the winning expectation will be lost at that time. In the present embodiment, the left-handed game ball (the game ball that has flowed down the left region) rolls through the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 but does not win the first start port 5442, and In any case where the game balls are removed from the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442 and have not won the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, these game balls reach the out port 57. In the meantime, it always passes through the second start port receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460). As described above, the upstream of the blade member 4620 is a region (second start port receiving region) where the game ball can be received in the second start port 440 if the blade member 4620 is open. In the case of rolling the flow path 222 toward the one start port 5442 but not winning the first start port 5442, and when the flow is removed from the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442, the general winning ports 53, 54, 55 are further removed. In any case where no prize is received, the expectation to win the second start port 440 continues, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, since the passage gate 49 is arranged in the right region, the expectation that the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is released when left-handed is low. However, immediately after the big hit gaming state or the short-time state ends, the normal symbol variation display may be suspended. Further, even if the player is making a left strike, the game ball that has jumped out of the game area 20 may flow down the right area. Therefore, even in the normal gaming state, the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is rarely opened. In addition, the guide nail 700 immediately flows into the out port 57 not only for the game ball that has flowed down the right region but also for the game ball that has flowed down to the guide member 700 side by momentum. Since it has the function to suppress, if the blade member 4620 is opened, there is a possibility of winning the second start port 440. Therefore, even if the winning expectation to the first starting opening 5442 and the general winning opening 53, 54, 55 is lost for the left-handed game ball, the expectation to win the second starting opening 440 continues. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the present embodiment, the passing gate 49 is disposed in the right region, but instead, the passing gate 491 may be disposed in the left region. In this case, there is a possibility that the frequency with which the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened is increased as compared with the case where the passage gate 49 is disposed in the right region. Therefore, even if the game ball that has been left-handed loses its expectation of winning at the first start opening 5442, it is possible to continue with higher expectations regarding winning at the second start opening 440. .

  Of the game balls that have been hit left (game balls that have flowed down the left area), the game balls that have not reached the top of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 or have not reached the first start port 5442 are, for example, You may comprise so that the game ball which flowed down the outflow path which leads to the out port 450 (for example, refer FIG. 3, FIG. 66) which exists under the normal electric equipment unit 400, for example, or the out port 57 may exist. At this time, among the left-handed game balls, the game balls that did not win the first start opening 5442 are the upper ones of the normal electric accessory unit 400 or the first start opening 5442, and the normal There are game balls that have reached the upper part of the electric accessory unit 400 or near the first start opening 5442 but have not won a prize, but any of the game balls may be led to the upstream of the blade member 4620. Only one of the game balls may be guided to the upstream side of the blade member 4620.

  Further, when a game ball that rolls in the direction of the big prize opening 540 out of the left-handed game balls (game balls that have flowed down the left region) rolls the game ball guide member 580, the game ball is the big prize opening 540. It collides with a rib provided on the shutter 610 or the game ball guiding member 580 and wins the first start port 5442 or flows into the out 55 or the out port 450.

  Further, in the present embodiment, game balls that have been hit right (flowing down the right side area) and have not won the big prize opening 540 are always left beyond the center of the gaming area 20 where the out mouth 57 is arranged. A game ball guiding member 580 that leads to the second start port receiving area of the area is provided. However, the game ball guiding member 580 has a function of guiding such a game ball (a game ball that has been hit right (flowed down the right area) and did not win the big prize opening 540) to the second start opening receiving area. It may not be necessary to have to be led to the left area beyond the center of the game area 20. For example, the game ball guiding member 580 has a function of guiding such a game ball to the left region, but the game ball guided to the left region is further distributed to a plurality of regions including the second start port receiving region. This is equivalent to the configuration.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has been hit right (flowing down the right region) and has not won the big prize opening 540 is guided to the left region by the game ball guiding member 580. The game ball guiding member 580 is not necessarily required, and for example, a structure in which a game ball that has been hit right and has not won the big prize opening 540 may be guided to the left region only by a guide nail.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball guiding member is used as a flow path of the game ball that is right-handed (flows down the right region) and reaches the exit side of the big prize opening 540 without winning the big prize opening 540. A flow path connecting the outlet side of 580 and the out port 57 is formed, and game balls flowing down this flow path always pass through the second start port receiving area before reaching the out port 57. It is supposed to be. In the present embodiment, since the second start port 440 is formed in the left region, the game balls flowing down the flow path are always guided to the left region. However, in view of the idea that the game ball flowing down the above route always passes through the second start opening receiving area before reaching the out opening 57, in such a case, the second start opening 440 is moved to the left area. It is not essential to be placed.

[Configuration of back unit]
Below, the structure of the back unit 176 is demonstrated using FIGS. 32-37. FIG. 32 is an example of a front view of the back unit 176. FIG. 33 is an example of a rear view of the back unit 176. FIG. 34 is an example of a perspective view of the back unit 176 as seen from diagonally upward on the front right. FIG. 35 is an example of a perspective view of the back unit 176 as seen from diagonally upward on the left side of the back surface. FIG. 36 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit 176 when viewed from the front right and diagonally upward. FIG. 37 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit 176 as seen from the upper left side obliquely.

  As described above, the back unit 176 includes the upper front part 1000, the upper back part 1100, the lower part 1200, the corner part 1300, the side part 1400, the middle panel 1500, and the attack ball bulb 1600. And at least a main board case 1700 and a rear box 1800. The corner accessory 1300 includes an upper corner accessory 1320 and a lower corner accessory 1350.

  The rear box 1800 has a box shape, and an opening 1820 is formed substantially at the center. The liquid crystal display device 16 and the like are disposed in the opening 1820.

  An upper back accessory 1100 (specifically, a base member 1180 (see, for example, FIG. 84) described later) is attached and fixed above the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. Details of the upper back part 1100 will be described later.

  A lower accessory 1200 (specifically, a lower accessory fixing base 1220 (for example, see FIG. 92) described later) is attached and fixed below the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. Details of the lower accessory 1200 will be described later.

  A side accessory 1400 (specifically, an attachment plate 1410 (see, for example, FIG. 116) described later) is attached and fixed to the right side of the front side opening 1820 of the rear box 1800. Details of the side accessory 1400 will be described later.

  The first movable body 1330 is located at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the upper corner combination 1320 (see, for example, FIG. 100) is on the front side of the upper back surface movable movable ornament 110. The body 1340 is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be positioned at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16, respectively. The third movable body 1355 is at the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the fourth movable body 1357 is at the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the lower corner combination 1350 is in front of the lower combination 1200. And fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be positioned respectively. The 1st movable body 1330, the 2nd movable body 1340, the 3rd movable body 1355, and the 4th movable body 1357 are arrange | positioned so that it may become a substantially the same position in the front-back direction. Details of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described later.

  The upper front accessory 1000 (specifically, a decorative accessory base member 1010 (see, for example, FIG. 84) described later) is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be disposed on the front side of the upper rear accessory 1000. The Details of the upper front object 1000 will be described later.

  The middle panel 1500 is disposed in an area corresponding to a part of the game area 20 on the back surface of the transparent panel 172, and includes a first middle panel 1520 and a second middle panel 1550. The first middle panel 1520 is a plate-like member having a pattern and a pattern on the front surface, and the pattern and pattern on the front surface can be visually recognized through the transparent panel 172. Although the details will be described later, the second middle panel 1550 is a plate-like member having an annular opening window 1552, and is configured such that a predetermined picture appears on the opening window when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Details of the second middle panel 1550 will be described later.

  The attacker ball bowl 1600 is a bowl-shaped bowl that accepts a game ball won in the general prize opening 56 and discharges it to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game balls that have won the big prize opening 540 are merged and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main board case 1700 accommodates a lamp relay board 1710, a main control relay board 1720, and the like.

  The back unit 176 further includes a first decorative design 1900 and a second decorative design 1920. The first decorative design 1900 is attached to the right side on the front side of the upper back accessory 1100. The second decorative design 1920 is attached to the left side of the front side of the upper back accessory 1100. The first decorative design 1900 and the second decorative design 1920 are decorated on the front surface, and both have a design function without moving.

[Attacker unit]
Below, the structure of the attacker unit 500 is demonstrated in detail using FIGS. 38-49.

  The attacker unit 500 includes a base member 510, a front side plate portion 520, a guide path 530, a special winning opening 540, a rear side case 550, and a special electric accessory 600.

  The base member 510 shown in FIGS. 38 to 43 and FIGS. 45 and 46 is a member that is the basis of the attacker unit 500. The base member 510 is formed in an elongated and substantially flat plate shape. The base member 510 is disposed with its longitudinal direction facing the left-right direction and its plate surface facing the front-rear direction. Various members constituting the attacker unit 500 are attached to the base member 510. A slit 511 is formed in the base member 510.

  The slit 511 is formed through the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The slit 511 is formed in the upper part of the base member 510 in a substantially straight line extending while gently tilting from the right to the left in a front view. In the slit 511, a shutter 610 described later (more specifically, a guide portion 611 of the shutter 610) is disposed.

  The front side plate portion 520 shown in FIGS. 38 to 42 and FIG. 44 is a member disposed at the front end portion of the attacker unit 500. The front side plate portion 520 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the base member 510. The front side plate portion 520 is disposed with its plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The front side plate portion 520 faces the base member 510 in the front-rear direction, and is disposed in a state of being spaced forward from the base member 510. In this way, a gap (hereinafter referred to as “special electric appliance space R2”) is formed between the front side plate portion 520 and the base member 510 so that a game ball can enter. In addition, the special electric appliance space R2 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the front plate portion 520 and the base member 510 in a front view. The front side plate portion 520 is attached to the base member 510 via a screw or the like. The front side plate part 520 is formed of a transparent resin material, and the player can visually recognize the rear side of the front side plate part 520.

  The guide path 530 shown in FIGS. 38 and 40 to 46 guides the moving game ball in a predetermined direction as appropriate. The guide path 530 is formed by a shutter 610 and a substantially plate-like member (wall portion) standing rearward from the front side plate portion 520. The guide path 530 includes a first guide path 531, a second guide path 532, and a third guide path 533.

  As described above, the guide path 530 (more specifically, the first guide path 531) is formed by the shutter 610. Here, as will be described later, the shutter 610 is configured to be able to advance and retract in the front-rear direction with respect to the base member 510 via a slit 511. In such a configuration of the shutter 610, the first guide path 531 is formed when the shutter 610 advances forward relative to the base member 510. Therefore, for the sake of convenience, the following description will be made assuming that the shutter 610 has advanced forward relative to the base member 510 (the state where the first guide path 531 is formed).

  The first guiding path 531 is arranged in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the special electric utility space R2. The first guide path 531 is formed in a substantially straight line extending while gently tilting from the right to the left. The length of the first guide path 531 in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) is slightly shorter than the base member 510. The left end portion of the first guide path 531 is formed in the vicinity of the left end portion of the special electric utility space R2. The right end portion of the first guiding path 531 is formed in the vicinity of the right end portion of the special electric utility space R2. The first guide path 531 configured in this manner guides the game ball that has moved from the right to the left. The first guide path 531 includes a speed reduction rib 534.

  The deceleration rib 534 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guide path 531 (deceleration means). The deceleration rib 534 includes a plurality of rear protrusions 534a that protrude forward from the base member 510 and a plurality of front protrusions 534b that protrude rearward from the front plate portion 520. In the present embodiment, six rear protrusions 534a are provided. Further, five front protrusions 534b are provided. The plurality of rear protrusions 534a and front protrusions 534b are arranged at appropriate intervals along the extending direction (left-right direction) of the first guide path 531. The appropriate interval is set to be longer than at least the diameter of the game ball. Further, the plurality of rear projections 534a and front projections 534b are arranged so as not to overlap in front view (does not face in the front-rear direction but shift in the left-right direction).

  With such a configuration of the first guide path 531, the game ball (moved by the first guide path 531) moves in a zigzag shape in plan view while colliding with the rear protrusion 534a and the front protrusion 534b. (Because smooth movement of the game ball is restricted), the moving speed is reduced.

  In this way, when the moving speed of the game ball moved by the first guide path 531 is decreased, a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531 can be created. As described above, when a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531, the plurality of game balls are guided to the third guide path 533 only by opening the shutter 610 once. Then, the winning prize opening 540 can be won. That is, round digestion in the jackpot game can be performed quickly. Even if the opening time of the shutter 610 is short, if a lot of game balls stay on the shutter 610, many winnings can be generated. In addition, since a large number of game balls can be won at once, it is easy to generate more wins (so-called over wins) than the number that can be won in one round of a big hit game.

  The second taxiway 532 is disposed immediately to the right of the first taxiway 531 in the special electrical equipment space R2. The second guide path 532 is formed in a substantially straight line extending while gently tilting from the right to the left. The tilt angle of the second guide path 532 is formed substantially the same as the tilt angle of the first guide path 531. Thus, the second guiding path 532 is configured as one substantially straight guiding path that is gently inclined from the right to the left together with the first guiding path 531. The second guiding path 532 configured in this manner guides the game ball that has moved from the right side to the left side (the first guiding path 531 side).

  The third guiding path 533 is arranged at a substantially central portion of the special electric utility space R2 in the vertical direction. The third guide path 533 is formed in a substantially straight line extending while gently tilting from the right to the left. The third guiding path 533 is disposed below the first guiding path 531. The third guiding path 533 is formed in the same shape and size as the first guiding path 531 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, a wall portion connected to the third guide path 533 is disposed between the left end of the third guide path 533 and the left end of the first guide path 531. In addition, a wall portion connected to the third guide path 533 is disposed between the right end portion of the third guide path 533 and the right end portion of the second guide path 532. Thus, the third guide path 533 is formed in a concave shape when viewed from the front.

  The third guide path 533 configured in this manner guides the game ball that has moved from the right side to the left side (the big prize opening 540 side). The third guide path 533 includes a guide part 535.

  The guide part 535 is formed at the lowermost part of the third guide path 533. The guide part 535 is a substantially triangular plate-like member in plan view. The guide portion 535 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the third guide path 533 backward.

  42, 43, 45 and 46 are formed by the base member 510 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The big prize opening 540 is formed at the rear of the lowermost portion of the third guide path 533 (the rear of the guide portion 535). The big prize opening 540 includes a count switch 541. As shown in FIG. 42, the count switch 541 is disposed below the special winning opening 540.

  The rear case 550 shown in FIG. 38, FIG. 40 to FIG. 42, FIG. 46, FIG. 48 and FIG. ). The rear case 550 is formed in a substantially rectangular hollow shape in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 48, in the rear case 550, an upper space and a lower space are partitioned by a substantially flat plate-shaped mounting portion 551 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. That is, the rear case 550 is formed in a two-story structure by the placement portion 551, and predetermined members are disposed in the upper space and the lower space, respectively. Specifically, a shutter 610, a link arm 630, and the like are disposed in the upper space. In the lower space, a big prize solenoid 620 and the like are arranged. The rear side case 550 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 via screws or the like. The inside and the outside of the rear case 550 (in front of the base member 510) communicate with each other via a slit 511.

[Special electric parts]
Below, the structure of the special electric accessory 6000 which concerns on 2nd embodiment is demonstrated in detail using FIGS. 50-65.

  The special electric accessory 6000 switches between a state where the game ball can be easily won in the big prize opening 540 (open state) and a state where it is difficult to win the game ball in the big prize port 540 (closed state). However, in the following description, the arrangement of various members will be described as being in a closed state unless otherwise specified.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the special electric accessory 6000 includes a housing portion 6001, a shutter 6002, a special prize opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004, and a regulating member 6005.

  50 to 53 is a member that accommodates various members (such as the shutter 6002, the special prize opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005) that constitute the special electric accessory 6000. The accommodating part 6001 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper side and the front side opened. The housing portion 6001 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 (see FIG. 38, etc.) via screws or the like. The housing portion 6001 includes a communication opening 6011, a support shaft 6012, a boss 6013, and a guide opening 6014.

  The communication opening 6011 communicates the upper side and the lower side of the housing part 6001. The communication opening 6011 is formed on the right side of the housing portion 6001. The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to penetrate the housing portion 6001 in the vertical direction. The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to surround from the rear to the right of a boss 6013 described later in plan view.

  The support shaft 6012 rotatably supports a link arm 6004 described later. The support shaft 6012 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape whose longitudinal direction is directed in the vertical direction. The support shaft 6012 is formed so as to protrude upward. The support shaft 6012 is formed at the right rear portion of the housing portion 6001 and behind the communication opening 6011.

  The boss part 6013 supports a regulating member 6005 described later so as to be rotatable. The boss portion 6013 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape whose longitudinal direction is directed in the vertical direction. The boss portion 6013 is formed so as to protrude upward. The boss part 6013 is formed in the vicinity of the center of the housing part 6001 (slightly to the right of the center) in the plan view and on the left front side of the communication opening 6011. In appropriate drawings such as FIGS. 50 to 52, the boss portion 6013 shows a state in which screws are attached to support the regulating member 6005.

  The guide opening 6014 is for inserting a guide shaft 6056 of a regulating member 6005 described later. More specifically, as will be described later, the movement (displacement) path of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is defined. The guide opening 6014 is formed in the vicinity of the center of the housing portion 6001 (slightly to the right of the center and to the left of the boss portion 6013) in plan view. The guide opening 6014 is formed so as to penetrate the housing portion 6001 in the vertical direction. The guide opening 6014 is formed in a substantially L shape in plan view that is bent halfway from one end to the other end in the longitudinal direction. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 53A, the guide opening 6014 includes a first guide opening 6016 and a second guide opening 6017.

  The first guide opening 6016 is formed to extend substantially linearly in the left-right direction. The first guide opening 6016 is formed rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the center P of the boss 6013. Note that the length in the left-right direction of the first guide opening 6016 is formed to be substantially the same as the length in the left-right direction of a connection opening 6036 of a prize winning solenoid 6003 described later.

  The second guide opening 6017 is formed to extend in an arc shape in plan view. More specifically, the second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to overlap with a part of an imaginary circle centered on the center P of the boss 6013 (see the dashed line arrow in FIG. 53A). Thus, the second guide opening 6017 is formed in the vicinity of the boss portion 6013 so as to extend along the outer shape of the boss portion 6013 in plan view. The rear end portion of the second guide opening 6017 is connected to the left end portion of the first guide opening 6016. The front end portion of the second guide opening 6017 is formed forward in the front-rear direction with respect to the center P of the boss portion 6013.

  A shutter 6002 shown in FIGS. 50 to 52 is a member (a member that switches between an open state and a closed state) that opens and closes the special prize opening 540 by power from a special prize opening solenoid 6003 described later. The configuration of the shutter 6002 is substantially the same as the shutter 610 of the special electric accessory 600 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 46, FIG. 47C, etc.). The shutter 6002 includes an elongated plate portion 6021, a connection plate portion 6022, and a connecting shaft 6023.

  The elongated plate portion 6021 is a member that forms the first guide path 531 (see FIG. 46 and the like). The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed in an elongated and substantially flat plate shape. The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed so that the longitudinal direction is in the left-right direction in plan view and the left side is lowered in front view (the upper side faces the upper left).

  The connecting plate portion 6022 is a member that connects the elongated plate portion 6021 and a connecting shaft 6023 described later. The connection plate 6022 is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape in plan view. Connection plate portion 6022 is formed so as to extend rearward from the center portion of elongated plate portion 6021 in the left-right direction.

  The connecting shaft 6023 is connected to a link arm 6004 described later. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed so as to protrude upward. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed in the vicinity of the rear end portion of the connection plate portion 6022.

  In the shutter 6002 having such a configuration, the elongated plate portion 6021 is inserted into the slit 511 (see FIG. 46 and the like) from the rear, and the connecting plate portion 6022 is placed on the bottom surface of the accommodating portion 6001. 6001. The shutter 6002 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the housing portion 6001.

  A prize winning solenoid 6003 shown in FIGS. 51, 52 and 54 is a member for driving the shutter 6002. The big prize opening solenoid 6003 includes a solenoid housing part 6031, a power generation part 6032, a plunger 6033, a power transmission part 6034 and a spring 6035.

  The solenoid housing portion 6031 is a member that houses various members constituting the special prize opening solenoid 6003. The solenoid housing portion 6031 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper side opened. The solenoid housing part 6031 is arranged with the longitudinal direction directed in the left-right direction. The solenoid housing portion 6031 is attached to the housing portion 6001 from below.

  The power generation unit 6032 is a member that generates the power of the special prize opening solenoid 6003. The power generation unit 6032 includes a coil, a fixed iron core, etc. (not shown). The power generation unit 6032 can suck a plunger 6033 described later in response to energization from a predetermined power source. The power generation unit 6032 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The power generation unit 6032 is housed inside (left part) of the solenoid housing part 6031 with the longitudinal direction (axial direction) directed in the left-right direction.

  The plunger 6033 is a member (movable iron core) formed in a substantially rod shape. The plunger 6033 is arranged with the longitudinal direction (axial direction) directed in the left-right direction. Plunger 6033 is arranged to extend rightward from power generation unit 6032. Plunger 6033 is configured to be capable of reciprocating in the left-right direction with respect to power generation unit 6032.

  The power transmission unit 6034 is a member that transmits the power generated by the special prize opening solenoid 6003 to another member (specifically, the link arm 6004). The power transmission unit 6034 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The power transmission unit 6034 is housed inside (right part) of the solenoid housing part 6031 and attached to the right end part of the plunger 6033. The power transmission unit 6034 includes a connection opening 6036 and a connection protrusion 6037.

  The connection opening 6036 is connected to a link arm 6004 described later. Connection opening 6036 is formed on the right side of power transmission unit 6034 in plan view. The connection opening 6036 is formed so as to penetrate the power transmission unit 6034 in the vertical direction.

  The connection protrusion 6037 is connected to a restriction member 6005 described later. The connecting protrusion 6037 is formed by a pair of plate-like portions formed so as to protrude upward. The pair of plate-like portions are formed to be parallel to each other on the left and right. With such a configuration, the connecting protrusion 6037 has a gap extending in the front-rear direction between the pair of plate-like portions. The connecting projection 6037 is formed at the left rear end of the power transmission unit 6034. In the following, the connecting protrusion 6037 refers to the gap.

  The spring 6035 is a so-called compression coil spring. The spring 6035 is disposed between the power generation unit 6032 and the power transmission unit 6034 in a state where the plunger 6033 is inserted and is always compressed. Thus, the spring 6035 always applies a rightward biasing force to the plunger 6033 (power transmission unit 6034).

  In the large winning opening solenoid 6003 having such a configuration, when the power generation unit 6032 is not energized, the plunger 6033 moves to the right by the urging force of the spring 6035. On the other hand, when the power generation unit 6032 is energized, the plunger 6033 moves to the left against the biasing force of the spring 6035 by the suction force of the power generation unit 6032. In this way, in the special winning opening solenoid 6003, by turning on and off the power generation unit 6032, the plunger 6033 can be reciprocated in the left-right direction with respect to the power generation unit 6032 to generate power.

  In the present embodiment, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the right (that is, when the power generation unit 6032 is not energized), the shutter 6002 slides forward, so that the game ball It will be in a state (closed state) where it is difficult to win a prize at the large winning opening 540. On the other hand, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the left (that is, when the power generation unit 6032 is energized), the shutter 6002 slides backward to the game ball big prize opening 540. It becomes a state (open state) where the winning of is easy.

  The link arm 6004 shown in FIG. 50 to FIG. 52 and FIG. 55 connects the big prize opening solenoid 6003 and the shutter 6002 so that they can be linked (linked connection), and transmits the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 to the shutter 6002. It is a member. The link arm 6004 is formed in a substantially L shape in plan view by a portion extending in the left-right direction (first link extension portion 6041) and a portion extending in the front-rear direction (second link extension portion 6042). Is done. The link arm 6004 includes a central tube portion 6043, a connection opening 6044, a connection shaft 6045, and a regulation protrusion 6046.

  The central cylinder part 6043 is inserted through the support shaft 6012 of the housing part 6001. The central tube portion 6043 is formed in the approximate center of the link arm 6004 (a connection portion between the first link extension portion 6041 and the second link extension portion 6042) in plan view. The central cylinder portion 6043 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the up-down direction. When the support shaft 6012 is inserted through the central cylinder portion 6043, the link arm 6004 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise around the central cylinder portion 6043 in plan view.

  The connection opening 6044 is inserted through the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002. The connection opening 6044 is formed at the left (front) end of the first link extension 6041. The connection opening 6044 is formed so as to penetrate the first link extension 6041 in the vertical direction. The connection opening 6044 is formed in a long hole shape that linearly extends from the distal end side to the proximal end side (the central cylindrical portion 6043 side). The length of the connection opening 6044 in the short direction in plan view is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002.

  The connecting shaft 6045 is connected to the connecting opening 6036 of the special winning opening solenoid 6003. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape whose longitudinal direction is directed in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed so as to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed at the front (front) end of the second link extension 6042. The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6045 is formed to be smaller than the inner diameter (length in the left-right direction) of the connecting opening 6036 of the big prize opening solenoid 6003.

  The restricting protrusion 6046 comes into contact with a restricting block 6054 of a restricting member 6005 described later in a predetermined case. The restricting protrusion 6046 is formed in a plate shape that protrudes downward. The restricting protrusion 6046 is formed in the vicinity of the base end portion of the first link extending portion 6041 and on the front left side of the central tube portion 6043 in plan view. The rear side surface of the restricting protrusion 6046 is formed to be a flat surface facing rearward.

  The regulating member 6005 shown in FIGS. 50 to 52 and 56 is a member for regulating unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state. The restricting member 6005 includes a central cylindrical portion 6053, a restricting block portion 6054, a connecting shaft 6055 and a guide shaft 6056.

  The central cylinder portion 6053 is inserted through the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001. The central cylinder portion 6053 is formed in the approximate center of the regulating member 6005 in plan view. The central cylinder portion 6053 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. Further, the central cylinder portion 6053 is formed in a long hole shape extending in the left-right direction in plan view.

  In addition, a plate-like portion (first regulation extending portion 6051) extending so as to spread in a plan view is formed on the right rear side of the central cylindrical portion 6053. Further, on the left side of the central cylinder portion 6053, a plate-like portion (second restriction extension portion 6052) extending so as to spread in a plan view is formed. Thus, the central cylindrical portion 6053, the first restriction extending portion 6051, and the second restriction extending portion 6052 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view. When the boss portion 6013 is inserted into the central cylindrical portion 6053, the regulating member 6005 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise around the central cylindrical portion 6053 in plan view.

  The restriction block portion 6054 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 in a predetermined case. The restriction block portion 6054 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped (block-shaped) portion protruding upward. The restriction block portion 6054 is formed in the approximate center of the first restriction extension portion 6051 (that is, the right rear side of the central cylinder portion 6053) in plan view. The front side surface of the restriction block portion 6054 is formed to be a flat surface facing forward.

  The connecting shaft 6055 is connected to the special prize opening solenoid 6003. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed so as to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed in the approximate center of the first restriction extension 6051 (that is, the right rear side of the center cylinder 6053) in plan view. Thus, the shaft center of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed so as to substantially overlap the shaft center of the restriction block portion 6054 in the vertical direction. The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed to be smaller than the width of the connecting projection 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 (that is, the gap of the connecting projection 6037).

  The guide shaft 6056 is inserted through the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001. The guide shaft 6056 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape whose longitudinal direction is directed in the vertical direction. The guide shaft 6056 is formed so as to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed in the approximate center of the second restriction extension 6052 (that is, the left side of the central cylinder 6053) in plan view. The outer diameter of the guide shaft 6056 is formed to be substantially the same as the length in the short direction of the guide opening 6014 (first guide opening 6016 and second guide opening 6017) in plan view.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52 and FIGS. 57 to 61, an assembly configuration of the housing portion 6001, the shutter 6002, the special winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005 in the special electric accessory 6000 will be described. To do.

  60 and subsequent drawings, the housing portion 6001 is indicated by a broken line, but the support shaft 6012, the boss portion 6013, and the guide opening 6014 are indicated by a solid line for convenience of explanation. In FIG. 60 and subsequent drawings, the link arm 6004 is indicated by a broken line, but the restricting protrusion 6046 is indicated by a solid line for convenience of explanation. Also, in the drawings after FIG. 61, the illustration of the configuration of each member is simplified for convenience of explanation.

  First, an outline of an assembly configuration of various members (the shutter 6002, the special winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005) with respect to the housing portion 6001 will be described.

  The shutter 6002 is placed on the bottom surface of the housing portion 6001. Thus, the shutter 6002 is arranged so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the housing portion 6001.

  The big prize opening solenoid 6003 is attached to the housing portion 6001 from below. In this way, the upper side and the lower side of the housing part 6001 (the power transmission part 6034 of the big prize solenoid 6003) are communicated with each other through the communication opening part 6011.

  Further, the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001 is inserted into the central tube portion 6043 of the link arm 6004 so as to be relatively rotatable from below. Thus, the link arm 6004 is supported by the housing portion 6001 so as to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view around the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001.

  Further, a boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 is inserted into the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 so as to be relatively rotatable from below. In this way, the regulating member 6005 is supported by the housing portion 6001 so as to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view around the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001.

  Next, the detail of the assembly structure of various members is demonstrated.

  As described above, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is moved downward to the housing portion 6001 through the communication opening 6011 of the housing portion 6001. And protruding. The connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is inserted from above into the connection opening 6036 of the big prize opening solenoid 6003 below the housing portion 6001. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the special prize opening solenoid 6003 are coupled to each other via the coupling shaft 6045 and the coupling opening 6036.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is disposed so as to abut on the left side edge of the connecting opening 6036 of the special winning opening solenoid 6003. That is, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged with a gap in the left-right direction in plan view between the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 of the big prize solenoid 6003.

  Further, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001, the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 is inserted from below into the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 are connected to each other via the connection opening 6044 and the connection shaft 6023 so as to be interlocked with each other.

  Further, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001, the restriction protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 comes into contact with the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005.

  As shown in FIG. 61A, the rear side surface of the restriction projection 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front side surface of the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 are planes parallel to each other. There is surface contact (not contact).

  Further, in the state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001, as shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 is the central cylinder of the regulating member 6005. It arrange | positions so that the left side edge part of the part 6053 may contact | abut.

  Further, in a state where the restricting member 6005 is supported by the boss part 6013 of the accommodating part 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 protrudes below the accommodating part 6001 through the communication opening 6011 of the accommodating part 6001. Is done. The connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 is inserted from above into the connecting protrusion 6037 (that is, the clearance of the connecting protrusion 6037) of the big prize opening solenoid 6003 below the housing portion 6001. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 are coupled via the coupling shaft 6055 and the coupling projection 6037 so as to be interlocked with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 is disposed in front of the connecting protrusion 6037 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037) of the special winning opening solenoid 6003.

  In addition, in a state where the regulating member 6005 is supported by the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is inserted from above into the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is a first guide opening of the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017 of the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001. It arrange | positions so that it may be located in the part 6016 (more specifically, it contact | abuts with the right end part of the 1st guidance | induction opening part 6016).

  As described above, in the state where the left edge portion of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001, the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is the first guiding opening 6016. It will be in the state contact | abutted with the right end part.

  In the following, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 65, when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state, the shutter 6002 is unintentionally opened by the regulating member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the housing portion 6001 (more in detail). Will be described in detail on the regulation of unintentional rotation of the link arm 6004 and unintentional movement of the shutter 6002.

  In this embodiment, the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 is not an opening according to the power generated by the big prize solenoid 6003 but an external force directly applied to the shutter 6002 (for example, a game ball to the shutter 6002). Or an opening in response to an unauthorized act on the shutter 6002 performed by an unauthorized person.

  In the following description, the rotation direction of each member is based on a plan view unless otherwise specified. In the following description, a state in which the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 is restricted by the restriction member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the housing portion 6001 is referred to as a “lock state”.

  In the special electric accessory 6000 assembled as described above, when an external force (a force that causes the shutter 6002 to slide rearward) is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the connection opening 6044 and the connection shaft 6023 are used. A force that rotates clockwise from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004 is transmitted.

  As shown in FIG. 61A, the restricting projection 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restricting block 6054 of the restricting member 6005 are rearward (that is, the moving direction when the link arm rotates clockwise). Abutted. Therefore, when a force that rotates clockwise from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004 is transmitted, the link arm 6004 and the restriction block portion 6054 counterclockwise from the link arm 6004 to the restriction member 6005. A rotating force is transmitted.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned within the first guide opening 6016 (more specifically, the right end of the first guide opening 6016 and Arranged so as to abut. That is, the edge of the first guide opening 6016 (hereinafter, the front edge) is disposed in front of the guide shaft 6056 of the restriction member 6005 (the moving direction when the restriction member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). The Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65A, even when a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the restricting member 6005, the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is the first. The restriction member 6005 cannot rotate because it interferes with the front edge of the guide opening 6016.

  Thus, since the regulating member 6005 cannot rotate, the link arm 6004 transmitting force to the regulating member 6005 cannot also rotate. In addition, since the link arm 6004 cannot rotate, the shutter 6002 that transmits force to the link arm 6004 cannot move. That is, even when an external force is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the shutter 6002 does not move backward against the external force and can maintain a closed state.

  As described above, when the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is positioned in the first guide opening 6016, the intention of the shutter 6002 is determined by the restricting member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the housing portion 6001. Opening (more specifically, unintentional rotation of the link arm 6004 and unintentional movement of the shutter 6002) is restricted (locked state).

  In the locked state, when a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the restricting member 6005, the rear side surface of the restricting projection 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restricting block 6054 The front side surfaces are pressed with a relatively strong force. However, since the rear side surface of the restricting protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front side surface of the restricting block portion 6054 of the restricting member 6005 are not in point contact with each other as described above, each durability is improved. Can be made.

  Hereinafter, a configuration in which the shutter 6002 is opened according to the power generated by the big prize opening solenoid 6003 when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

  As will be described later, when the shutter 6002 is opened according to the power generated by the special prize opening solenoid 6003, unlike the case where an external force is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the regulating member 6005 and the housing portion 6001. The locked state by the guide opening 6014 (locking means) is released.

  When the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is located in the first guide opening 6016 (when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state), when the shutter 6002 is opened, the power generating unit 6032 of the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is energized. Is done. When the power generation unit 6032 is energized, the plunger 6033 starts to move to the left as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, and power is generated by the big prize opening solenoid 6003. When the movement of the plunger 6033 to the left is started, the power transmission unit 6034 (the connection opening 6036 and the connection protrusion 6037) fixed to the right end of the plunger 6033 similarly moves to the left.

  When the connection projection 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 moves to the left, the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulation member 6005 via the connection projection 6037 and the connection shaft 6055 of the regulation member 6005. . Specifically, the connection protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connection shaft 6055 of the restriction member 6005 to the left. Thus, when the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted, the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the housing portion 6001.

  Specifically, the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, and the right edge portion of the central cylindrical portion 6053 abuts on the boss portion 6013. In addition, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the first guide opening 6016 of the housing portion 6001, and the left end of the first guide opening 6016 (the rear end of the second guide opening 6017). Part).

  In the following, the movement of the power transmission unit 6034 until the right edge of the central cylindrical part 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is brought into contact with the boss part 6013 (the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is the first guiding opening of the housing part 6001). The movement until the left end portion 6016 is brought into contact with the left end portion is referred to as “first movement of the power transmission portion 6034”. Further, the movement of the power transmission portion 6034 after the right edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is brought into contact with the boss portion 6013 (the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is moved to the first guiding opening 6016 of the housing portion 6001). Is referred to as “second movement of the power transmission unit 6034”.

  Further, when the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 moves to the left by the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the connection opening 6036 moves to the left with respect to the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. The right edge of the connection opening 6036 abuts on the connection shaft 6045. In the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 does not press the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 at all during the movement. That is, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the power from the special prize opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004.

  In the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the timing at which the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 abuts on the left end of the first guide opening 6016 (the rear end of the second guide opening 6017) and the regulation The timing at which the right edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the member 6005 contacts the boss 6013 and the timing at which the right edge of the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 contacts the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 are all. It is set substantially the same.

  In the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is positioned in the first guide opening 6016 and the front of the guide shaft 6056 (the restricting member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). In the moving direction in the case of performing, the front edge of the first guide opening 6016 is disposed. That is, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, even when a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulating member 6005, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is moved. Since it interferes with the front side edge of the first guide opening 6016, the locked state by the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the regulating member 6005 and the housing 6001 is continued.

  Further, as described above, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the power from the special prize opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004. That is, the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted from the power transmission unit 6034 to the restricting member 6005, but not transmitted to other members (for example, the link arm 6004). Thus, although the regulating member 6005 moves to the left, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 do not rotate (move) in any direction, and maintain the posture when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state. Become.

  In such a state, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, when the power transmission unit 6034 further moves leftward (when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement), the connecting protrusion of the power transmission unit 6034 The power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulating member 6005 via the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 and 6037. Specifically, the connection protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connection shaft 6055 of the restriction member 6005 to the left.

  Here, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the right edge portion of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss portion 6013. That is, the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 cannot move to the left with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001. Therefore, when the connecting projection 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 to the left, the restricting member 6005 tends to rotate counterclockwise around the boss 6013 of the housing portion 6001.

  Further, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 contacts the left end portion of the first guide opening portion 6016 of the housing portion 6001 (the rear end portion of the second guide opening portion 6017). It is touched. Note that the second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to overlap with a part of a virtual circle centered on the center P of the boss 6013. In other words, an opening is formed in front of the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 (the moving direction when the restricting member 6005 rotates counterclockwise) along the trajectory of the guide shaft 6056 moving ( There is nothing to interfere when the guide shaft 6056 moves).

  Thus, when the connecting projection 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 to the left, and the restricting member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the boss 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, FIG. As shown in (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is guided by the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001, and the second guide opening 6017 moves forward. When the regulating member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the boss 6013 of the housing portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 moves rearward relative to the power transmission portion 6034. I will do it.

  Note that the regulating member 6005 varies the position of the rotation center in the left-right direction when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the first movement as described above and when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement. ing. Specifically, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the first movement, the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 in contact with the left side edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned at the center of rotation. And Further, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 in contact with the right edge portion of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is set as the rotation center position.

  In this way, the regulating member 6005 has a different position at the center of rotation so that the front side of the first guiding opening 6016 is located in front of the guiding shaft 6056 (the moving direction when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). It is switched whether there is an edge or the second guide opening 6017 extends.

  As described above, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, the lock state of the regulating member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 (locking unit) of the housing unit 6001 is released, and the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is housed. The second guide opening 6017 of the part 6001 can be moved forward. That is, when the connecting projection 6037 of the power transmission portion 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 to the left, the restricting member 6005 rotates counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001. To do.

  Further, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, the right edge of the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 is in contact with the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. That is, power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the link arm 6004 via the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 and the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. Specifically, the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 to the left. Thus, when the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 to the left, the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise.

  When the power transmission unit 6034 performs the first movement (when it is in the locked state), when the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, that is, with the restricting projection 6046 of the link arm 6004. When a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the restriction member 6005 through the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005, the guide shaft 6056 of the restriction member 6005 is moved to the first guide opening. The restriction member 6005 could not rotate because it interfered with the front edge of the portion 6016.

  However, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the guide shaft 6056 of the restriction member 6005 can move forward through the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001 as described above. The restriction block portion 6054 of 6005 also moves backward. When the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 moves rearward, it moves in a direction away from the restriction protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004.

  Therefore, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, when the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the regulation projection 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block 6060 of the regulation member 6005. Does not interfere with. That is, the link arm 6004 can rotate counterclockwise.

  When the link arm 6004 rotates counterclockwise, the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the shutter 6002 through the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 and the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002. Specifically, the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 presses the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 backward. Thus, when the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 presses the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 backward, the shutter 6002 starts to slide backward.

  The second movement of the power transmission unit 6034 ends when the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 reaches the front end of the second guide opening 6017 of the housing unit 6001 as shown in FIG. Thus, when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 reaches the front end portion of the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001, the shutter 6002 is opened.

  As described above, the configuration in which the shutter 6002 is opened from the closed state has been described. However, when the shutter 6002 is closed from the opened state, the energization of the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is stopped, and then the shutter 6002 is opened. Various members (the shutter 6002, the big prize opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, and the restricting member 6005) operate in the reverse order to the case where they are performed.

  Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, for example, a technique of providing a displaceable member that can be displaced between a position where the passing of the game ball is easy with respect to the passing area and a position where the passing of the game ball is difficult Is known. For example, as described in JP-A-2008-307103.

  In the technique described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307103, a door member of a winning device is provided as the displacement member. Further, a solenoid is employed as a drive source for displacing the door member (reciprocating between a position to be opened and a position to be closed).

  In the technique described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307103, the lock portion provided in the transmission means of the solenoid and the engaging projection portion provided in the door member come into contact with each other to close the device. The opening of the door member at the position can be restricted (locked).

  However, since the locking part and the engaging projection part require a certain degree of accuracy in the mutual positional relationship, if there is aging deterioration of the solenoid or contamination of the solenoid drive path, foreign matter is completely Will not touch. As described above, when the lock portion and the engagement projection portion are not completely in contact with each other, there is a possibility that the door member may be loose at the closing position or the door member may be slightly opened (unintentional displacement is performed). There was a possibility).

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and more reliably regulates unintended displacement of a displacement member when the displacement member is displaced at a position where it is difficult for a game ball to pass therethrough. An object is to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes the game board 17 having the game area 20 where the game ball rolls, and the second start port 440 provided in the game area 20 and through which the game ball can pass. (Passing area) and a displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) that can be displaced between a position where the game ball can easily pass and a position where the game ball cannot pass with respect to the second start port 440 (passing area). And a main winning circuit solenoid 6003 (driving means) for driving the displacement member, and a main control circuit 100 (driving control means) capable of controlling the large winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means). The displacement member is in a state in which the displacement control is performed at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, and the main control circuit 100 (drive control means) allows the game ball to pass through the displacement member easily. When the control to displace the game ball is not performed, it is provided with lock means (the regulating member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001) that can lock the displacement member at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, The mouth solenoid 6003 (driving means) is a power transmission capable of transmitting the power generated by the power generation unit 6032 to the displacement member by contacting a power generation unit 6032 that generates power and at least a part of the displacement member. The locking means is in contact with at least a part of the displacement member, thereby regulating a restriction member 6005 (regulation portion) that regulates displacement of the displacement member, and a displacement path of the restriction portion. A guide opening 6014 (displacement guide), and the displacement path includes a first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section) and the first guide opening. A second guide opening 6017 (second displacement section) that is different from 6016 (first displacement section), and the displacement member of the game ball is in contact with the power transmission section 6034 at least partially. The displacement is controlled to a position where passage is easy and a position where passage of the game ball is difficult, and the restriction member 6005 (restriction portion) is moved to the guide opening 6014 (displacement induction portion) as the power transmission portion 6034 is displaced. Displacement control is possible, and the locking means maintains the locked state of the displacement member when the restriction member 6005 (restriction portion) is positioned in the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section). When the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is positioned in the second guide opening 6017 (second displacement section), the locked state of the displacement member is released.

  With such a configuration, the locking means (the restricting member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001) is, for example, only when the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is located at the right end of the first guide opening 6016. Instead, while the guide shaft 6056 is positioned in the first guide opening 6016, the displacement member (the shutter 6002 and the link arm 6004) can be kept locked. That is, even when the positional relationship between the regulating member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001 is slightly shifted (for example, even if the power transmission portion 6034 is not disposed at a normal position), the locked state Can be maintained. Therefore, when the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is displaced to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, unintended displacement of the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is more reliably regulated. can do.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement of the restriction member 6005 (restriction part) includes movement and rotation, and the lock member includes the restriction member 6005 (restriction part). When positioned in one guide opening 6016 (first displacement section), the restriction member 6005 (restriction part) is restricted from rotating while the restriction member 6005 (restriction part) can move. When the state is maintained and the restriction member 6005 (restriction part) is positioned in the second guide opening 6017 (second displacement section), the position of the rotation center of the restriction member 6005 (restriction part) is restricted to the restriction. Different from the case where the member 6005 (regulating portion) is located in the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section), the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) can be rotated to release the locked state. Is shall.

  With such a configuration, the restricting member 6005 (the restricting portion), which is one member, can switch between maintaining and releasing the locked state by a combination of two operations (movement and rotation). In this way, for example, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with a case where members for performing two operations (movement and rotation) are provided. In particular, in the special electric accessory as in this embodiment, the arrangement space of the parts is limited, and thus it is beneficial to have such a configuration.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement member includes a shutter 6002 (game ball guiding unit) for guiding a game ball, and a link arm 6004 (link unit) connected to the game ball guiding unit. The power transmission unit 6034 is in contact with the link arm 6004 (link unit).

  With such a configuration, since the power transmission unit 6034 is in contact with the link arm 6004 (link portion) instead of the shutter 6002 (game ball guiding portion), the power transmission portion 6034 is not in direct contact with the shutter 6002 (game ball guiding portion). The shutter 6002 (game ball guiding unit) can be locked.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the special electric accessory 6000 has been described as an example of an object to be locked, but the object to be locked is not limited to this, and is an ordinary electric accessory or the like. May be.

  Further, when the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034 is finished, the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the link arm 6004. As described above, when the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the link arm 6004, the restriction protrusion portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 are brought into contact with each other. Can be released. That is, the restricting projection 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restricting block 6054 of the restricting member 6005 can be arranged so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  According to such a configuration, when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement, when the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the regulation protrusion 6046 and the regulation member 6005 of the link arm 6004 are rotated. Interference with the restriction block portion 6054 (restriction of rotation of the link arm 6004) can be more reliably prevented.

  Even when the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034 is finished, the state where the restriction projection 6046 of the link arm 6004 is in contact with the restriction block 6054 of the restriction member 6005 is maintained, and the link arm When 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the restricting projection 6046 of the link arm 6004 presses the restricting block 6054 of the restricting member 6005, thereby assisting the turning of the restricting member 6005. .

  Further, the configuration of the guide opening 6014 (the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017) is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. For example, the guide opening 6014 (displacement guide) is when the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise when the power transmission portion 6034 is moving first (in the locked state). In addition, it may be formed so as to interfere with the movement of the guide shaft 6056 in front of the guide shaft 6056 (the moving direction when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). In addition, from the viewpoint of smoothly promoting the movement of the guide shaft 6056, the configuration according to the present embodiment formed along the movement path of the guide shaft 6056 is desirable.

[Configuration of normal electric accessory unit 400]
With reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, the configuration of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 will be briefly described. FIG. 66 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 as seen from diagonally upward on the front right. FIG. 67 is a view of an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 as viewed from the rear left (left in the front view) obliquely upward.

  The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is attached and fixed to the lower left of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the game area 20. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 includes a general winning port 53, 54, 55, a second starting port 440, a second starting port switch 441 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440, and an out port 450. And a receiving member 443 that receives the game ball won in the second start port 440 and the game ball received in the out port 450 and discharges it to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the front surfaces of the second start port 440 and the out port 450 A front cover 445 provided on the main body and a normal electric accessory 460. The second start port 440 and the out port 450 are formed in the plate-shaped opening forming member 420. The opening forming member 420 is formed with a hole 442 through which a rotating shaft 4622 of a blade member 4620 described later passes.

  The second start port 440 and the out port 450 are disposed adjacent to each other, the second start port 440 is disposed on the right side when viewed from the front, and the out port 450 is disposed on the left side when viewed from the front.

  A wall 4452 that partitions the second start port 440 and the out port 450 is formed on the back surface of the front cover 445. The wall 4452 prevents the game ball (game ball winning the second starting port 440) that has passed through the upper portion of the blade member 4620 from being received by the out port 450 when the blade member 4620 is opened. It has a function of preventing the game ball from winning the second starting port 440 when the blade member 4620 is not opened.

  The second start port switch 441 is arranged on the back side of the second start port 440 so that a game ball won in the second start port 440 can be detected.

  The housing member 443 is provided with an opening 4434 and an opening 4436 at portions corresponding to the second start port 440 and the out port 450, respectively. The second start port 440 is won and detected by the second start port switch 441. The game ball is accommodated in the opening 4434, and the game ball received in the out port 450 is accommodated in the opening 4436. The game balls accommodated in the openings 4434 and 4436 are collected in a game ball circulation facility provided in an island facility (not shown). In addition, the housing member 443 has a hole 4432 through which a rotation shaft 4622 of a blade member 4620 described later passes.

[Configuration of ordinary electric accessory 460]
With reference to FIGS. 66 to 70, the configuration of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described. FIG. 68 is an example of a diagram illustrating the ordinary electric accessory 460, the second start port switch 441, and the housing member 443. FIG. 69 is a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460. FIG. 70 is an example of a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460 as viewed obliquely from the upper right.

  The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a base cover 4610, a blade member 4620, a start port solenoid 4630, and a power transmission mechanism 4640 that transmits power from the start port solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620.

  The base cover 4610 is attached to the back side of the opening forming member 420 after accommodating the start port solenoid 4630 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 with the housing member 443. The back side of the base cover 4610 is attached and fixed to the transparent panel 172 described above. A long guide groove 4612 in the left-right direction is formed on the front side of the base cover 4610. Further, a bearing (not shown) that rotatably supports a pin 4648 described later is formed on the front side of the base cover 4610.

  The blade member 4620 is provided with a rotation shaft 4622 below the paper surface. The rotating shaft 4622 passes through a hole 442 formed in the opening forming member 420 and a hole 4432 formed in the housing member 443, and is rotatably supported by a bearing 46444 of a blade connecting member 4642 described later. The rotating shaft 4622 is cut out at a portion that is pivotally supported by the bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642, and has a non-circular cross-sectional shape in the axial direction. Further, when the power transmission mechanism 4640 transmits the power from the start-port solenoid 4630 to the rotating shaft 4622 as a rotational force, the blade member 4620 rotates about the rotating shaft 4622 as a rotation center. In the present embodiment, the blade member 4620 is in a closed state when standing up, and is in an open state when the blade member 4620 is rotated in the right direction around the rotation shaft 4622 from the closed state.

  The start-up solenoid 4630 includes a plunger 4632 that expands and contracts in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and has a flange 4634 at the distal end of the plunger 4632 (the distal end on the right side when viewed from the front). The start-up solenoid 4630 is normally (non-excited) in a state where the plunger 4632 extends in the right direction when viewed from the front, and when energized, the plunger 4632 moves in the left direction (the contraction direction) when viewed from the front.

  The power transmission mechanism 4640 converts this power into a rotational force 4602 of the blade member 4620 and transmits it as the plunger 4632 of the start port solenoid 4630 expands and contracts in the left-right direction. The power transmission mechanism 4640 is connected to the blade connecting member 4642 connected to the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620, the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the start port solenoid 4630, the flange connecting member 4646, and the blade connecting member 4642. And a link member 4644 provided between the flange connecting member 4646 and the flange connecting member 4646.

  The blade connecting member 4642 includes a bearing 46444 that supports the rotation shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620. The bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642 corresponds to the shape of the rotating shaft 4622 that supports the blade. Therefore, the blade connecting member 4642 rotates with the rotation shaft 4622 about the rotation shaft 4622. Further, the blade connecting member 4642 has a support shaft 46426 that protrudes to the back side. The support shaft 46426 can rotate around a rotation shaft 4622 that is supported by a bearing 46424.

  The link member 4644 is a U-shaped member when viewed from the front, and a long hole 46442 is formed at an end portion below the front view. A support shaft 46426 of a blade connecting member 4642 is slidably connected to the elongated hole 46442. A support shaft 46446 that protrudes to the back side is formed at the upper end of the link member 4644 in front view. An engaging shaft 46448 is formed below the support shaft 46446 so as to project to the back side. A bearing 46444 that rotatably supports the pin 4648 is formed at the center of the link member 4644 (the portion where the angle of the character changes). The link member 4644 is rotatable about a pin 4648 pivotally supported by the bearing 46444. When the link member 4644 rotates about the pin 4648 supported by the bearing 46444, the support shaft 46446 and the engagement shaft 46448 also rotate about the pin 4648 supported by the bearing 46444.

  The flange connection member 4646 includes a flange holding portion 46462, a connection hole 46464, and an engagement groove 46466. The flange clamping portion 46462 clamps the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the start port solenoid 4630, and the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the expansion / contraction direction of the plunger 4632 as the plunger 4632 expands / contracts. The support shaft 46446 of the link member 4644 is connected to the connection hole 46464 so as to be able to move in the connection hole 46464. An engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 is engaged with the engagement groove 46466. Here, the engagement shaft 46448 has a hook shape having a pointed end in a cross-sectional shape crossing the longitudinal direction. Then, the link member 4644 engages with the engagement groove 46466 at the tip portion. Further, the flange connecting member 4646 has a guide piece 46468 that is long in the left-right direction on the back side (base cover 4610 side). The guide piece 46468 is guided by a guide groove 4612 formed in the base cover 4610.

[Explanation of operation of normal electric accessory 460]
Next, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 71 shows an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (illustrated by a one-dot chain line), and a normal state when the blade member 4620 is in a state of transition from the closed state toward the open state. It is an example of the rear view which shows the aspect (illustrated with a continuous line) of the electric accessory 460. FIG. 72 shows an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in a state of transition (illustrated by a one-dot chain line) and an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in an open state (solid line). FIG.

  When start-up solenoid 4630 is excited, plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction (leftward in front view (rightward in FIGS. 71 and 72)). When the plunger 4632 moves in the contracting direction, the flange 4634 (see FIGS. 66 and 67) moves in the contracting direction. When the flange 4634 moves in the contracting direction, the flange connecting member 4646 that clamps the flange 4634 with the flange clamping portion 46462 moves in the contracting direction. When the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the contraction direction, the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engaged with the engaging groove 46466 of the flange connecting member 4646 is disengaged. When the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engaged with the engagement groove 46466 of the flange connecting member 4646 is disengaged, the link member 4644 is moved to the front with the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444 as the center of rotation. Rotate counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 71 and 72) visually. At this time, the link member 4644 can move downward in the connection hole 46464 of the flange connection member 4646. When the link member 4644 rotates counterclockwise around the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444 as viewed from the front, the support shaft 46426 slidably coupled within the elongated hole 46442 of the blade coupling member 4642 is obtained. The blade coupling member 4642 rotates around the rotation shaft 4622 as the center of rotation, and the blade member 4620 operates toward the open state.

  The operation of the blade member 4620 from the open state to the closed state moves in the direction in which the plunger 4632 extends due to the start port solenoid 4630 being de-energized, and the movement opposite to the operation from the closed state to the open state Is done by. The portion of the engagement groove 46466 that contacts the engagement shaft 46448 so that the engagement shaft 46448 is smoothly engaged with the engagement groove 46466 when the blade member 4620 is operated from the open state to the closed state. Is inclined toward the lower right direction (the lower left direction in FIGS. 71 and 72) in a front view.

[Functional explanation of normal electric accessory 460]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the function of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described. FIG. 73 is a rear view of the blade member 4620 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 for explaining the function of the flange connecting member 4646, and (A) a view for explaining that the opening of the blade member 4620 is prevented. (B) It is a figure for demonstrating that opening | releasing of the blade member 4620 is accept | permitted. 73 (A) and 73 (B), the start port solenoid 4630 is not shown.

  When the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (when the plunger 4632 of the start solenoid 4630 (both see FIG. 71, for example) is de-energized), the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 is engaged with the engagement groove 46466. Therefore, the link member 4644 cannot rotate (rotate around the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444) (see FIG. 73A). Therefore, as long as the plunger 4632 does not move in the contraction direction (unless special circumstances such as failure occur, unless the start port solenoid 4630 is excited), the blade member 4620 cannot be opened. Therefore, even if a force is applied from the outside to open the blade member 4620 illegally, this can be prevented.

  On the other hand, when the start port solenoid 4630 is excited, the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction as described above, the engagement between the engagement shaft 46448 and the engagement groove 46466 is released, and the blade member 4620 is opened (see FIG. 73 (b)).

  In this way, the link member 4644 that forms the engagement shaft 46448, the flange connection member 4646 that forms the engagement groove 46466, and the start port solenoid 4630 prevent the blade member 4620 from being illegally opened. It functions as a means to prevent unauthorized opening.

[Composition of upper front part 1000]
The structure of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. FIG. 74 is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory 1000 in the normal mode (mode when in the origin position). FIG. 75 is an example of a rear view of the upper front accessory 1000 in the normal mode. FIG. 76 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 when viewed from the front right and diagonally upward. FIG. 77 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 viewed from the rear left (left in the front view) obliquely from above.

  The upper front accessory 1000 is operable with respect to a base plate 1010 to which various members constituting the upper front accessory 1000 are attached, a decorative plate 1030 attached and fixed to the front side of the base plate 1010, and the base plate 1010. A movable decorative body 1040 configured, a drive motor 1050 as a drive source for operating the movable decorative body 1040, and a plurality of gears 1060 capable of transmitting the power of the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040; A force transmission member 1020 that transmits power from the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040 via the plurality of gears 1060, and a coil spring 1070 as an example of an elastic member that urges the movable decorative body 1040 toward the origin position. And a photosensor 1080 (see FIG. 77) for detecting the position of the movable decorative body 1040.The gear 1060 and the force transmission member 1020 function as a force transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040.

  The base plate 1010 is a plate-like member that is attached and fixed to the upper portion of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above so as to be positioned in front of the upper back surface accessory 1100. A first support shaft 1011, a second support shaft 1012, a third support shaft 1013, and a fourth support shaft 1014 connected to various members of the force transmission member 1020 are formed on the front surface side of the base plate 1010. In addition, when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the base plate 1010 has a notch 1016 formed at a position where a bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022 described later is located, and the movable decorative body 1040 at the origin position. , A notch 1017 formed at a position corresponding to a later-described coil spring support shaft 1042 (lower end of the coil spring 1070) formed on the back side of the movable decorative body 1040 is formed. In this specification, the notch 1016 and the notch 1017 are referred to as a back side first notch 1016 and a back side second notch 1017, respectively. Further, the base plate 1010 has a bearing 1054 that pivotally supports a hollow boss 1062 formed at the center of the first gear 1062 described later, and a hole 1015 corresponding to a movable range of the boss 10672 of the fourth gear 1067 described later. A hole 1018 corresponding to a movable range of a position detection piece 10682 of a position detection gear 1068 described later is formed.

  The decoration plate 1030 is decorated on the front side although not shown. The decorative plate 1030 is formed at a position where a bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022 described later is located (a position on the front side corresponding to the first notch 1016 on the back side) when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position. A notch 1036 is formed, and a notch 1038 is formed at a position where the lower end of the coil spring 1070 is located (a position on the front side corresponding to the rear-side second notch 1017). In this specification, the notch 1036 and the notch 1038 are referred to as a front side first notch 1036 and a front side second notch 1038, respectively.

  The movable decorative body 1040 includes a coil spring support shaft 1042 connected to the lower side end of the coil spring 1070, a first transmission member side support shaft 1044 supported by a bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022 described later, and a later described. A second transmission member side support shaft 1046 that is supported by the bearing 10264 of the second transmission member 1026 is formed.

  The drive motor 1050 is attached and fixed to the base plate 1010 via a motor attachment member 1054. The drive motor 1050 is a motor with a reduction gear, and the rotational speed of the drive motor 1050 is reduced and power is output from the motor output shaft 1052.

  The gear 1060 includes a first gear 1062, a second gear 1064, a third gear 1066, a fourth gear 1067, and a position detection gear 1068. Among these gears, the first gear 1062, the second gear 1064, the third gear 1066, and the fourth gear 1067 have a function of transmitting the power output from the motor output shaft 1052 to the force transmission member 1020. The detection gear 1068 does not have such a function.

  A hollow shaft 10622 is formed at the center of the first gear 1062. A motor output shaft 1052 is press-fitted into the hollow shaft 10622. Thus, when the drive motor 1050 rotates, the first gear 1062 rotates around the center of the first gear 1062 (motor output shaft 1052) as the rotation center.

  The fourth gear 1067 is formed with a boss 10672 at a portion on the front surface side that is a predetermined distance away from the center 10474 in the radial direction. In the position detection gear 1068, a position detection piece 10682 is formed at a portion on the front side that is a predetermined distance away from the center 10684 in the radial direction. The position detection gear 1068 has substantially the same diameter as the fourth gear 1067. Therefore, the position detection gear 1068 rotates in the opposite direction by the same rotation angle in synchronization with the rotation of the fourth gear 1067. In this way, the position of the movable decorative body 1040 can be detected. In the present embodiment, the position detection of the movable decorative body 1040 detects whether or not it is at the origin position.

  The force transmission member 1020 includes a first transmission member 1022 to which power from the drive motor 1050 is transmitted via a gear 1060, a rack 1024 to which power transmitted to the first transmission member 1022 is transmitted, and a first transmission member. And a second transmission member 1026 to which the power from 1022 is transmitted through the rack 1024.

  The first transmission member 1022 is a fan-shaped plate-like member, and a bearing 10222 is formed at the center in the radial direction. The bearing 10222 supports the first support shaft 1011 formed on the base plate 1010. The first transmission member 1022 extends from the radially outer side to the inner side (that is, the center of the first transmission member 1022 (bearing 10222)) along the side 1022a on the left side in the front view of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b. An elongate hole 10224 is formed in the direction of heading. A boss 10672 of the fourth gear 1067 that penetrates the hole 1015 is connected to the elongated hole 10224 so as to be movable in the elongated hole 10224. Of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b of the first transmission member 1022, a bearing 10226 is formed at the radially outer end along the right side 1022b in the front view. The bearing 10226 supports a support shaft 1044 formed on the movable decorative body 1040. The side 1022b of the first transmission member 1022 is substantially horizontal when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position. The first transmission member 1022 includes a gear 10228 that is coaxial with the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10222) and rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the first transmission member 1022.

  The second transmission member 1026 is a rod-like member that is substantially horizontal when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position. The second transmission member 1026 is formed with a bearing 10262 at the end on the left side when viewed from the front, and at the right end when viewed from the front. A bearing 10264 is formed. The bearing 10262 supports the fourth support shaft 1014 of the base plate 1010. The bearing 10264 supports the support shaft 1046 of the movable decorative body 1040. The second transmission member 1026 includes a gear 10266 that is coaxial with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262). The gear 10266 has substantially the same diameter as the gear 10228 provided on the first transmission member 1022.

  A rack 1024 that transmits power from the first transmission member 1022 to the second transmission member 1026 is provided between the first transmission member 1022 and the second transmission member 1026. The rack 1024 is a bar-like member provided substantially horizontally. A gear 10244 is formed on the right side (first transmission member 1022 side) when viewed from the front, and a gear 10248 is formed on the left side (second transmission member 1026 side) when viewed from the front. Is formed. The gear 10244 is meshed with the gear 10228 and converts the rotational power of the gear 10228 into a substantially horizontal direction. The gear 10248 further converts the motive power converted in the substantially horizontal direction by the gear 10244 into the rotational direction and transmits it to the second transmission member 1026. The rack 1024 has a long hole 10242 that is long in the substantially horizontal direction on the right side (gear 10244 side) in front view, and a long hole 10246 that is long in the substantially horizontal direction on the left side (gear 10248 side) in front view. A second support shaft 1012 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the elongated hole 10242, and a third support shaft 1013 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the elongated hole 10246.

  The coil spring 1070 urges the movable decorative body 1040 toward the origin position. The upper end of the coil spring 1070 is attached and fixed to the back side of the base plate 1010, and the lower end is attached and fixed to a coil spring support shaft 1042 formed on the back side of the movable decorative body 1040. When the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the lower end of the coil spring 1070 is located at the front side second notch 1038 and the back side second notch 1017.

  The photosensor 1080 is provided so as to be positioned in a photosensor arrangement region 1019 formed on the base plate 1010. The photo sensor 1080 detects the position of the movable decorative body 1040 by detecting the position detection piece 10682 provided in the position detection gear 1068. In the present embodiment, the photo sensor 1080 is provided so that the position detection piece 10682 can be detected when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position.

[Explanation of operation of upper front object 1000]
Next, the operation of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 78 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 at the origin position. FIG. 79 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 in which the movable decorative body 1040 is moving downward. FIG. 80 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 when the movable decorative body 1040 moves downward to the operation limit position. 78 to 80, the constituent members of the force transmission member 1020 are indicated by broken lines so that the movement of each member can be understood.

  When the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the drive motor 1050 rotates and the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise in front view. Accordingly, the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise in front view. To do. When the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the second gear 1064 that meshes with the teeth of the first gear 1062 rotates clockwise in front view. When the second gear 1064 rotates clockwise in front view, the third gear 1066 that meshes with the teeth of the second gear 1064 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the fourth gear 1067 engaged with the third gear 1066 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front with the center 10664 of the fourth gear 1067 as the rotation center. When the fourth gear 1067 rotates clockwise around the center 10474 as the center of rotation, the boss 10672 also rotates in the circumferential direction around the center 10474 and moves clockwise along the hole 1015. Since the boss 10672 is movably coupled in the elongated hole 10224, when the boss 10672 rotates clockwise around the center 10474 as the center of rotation, the first transmission member 1022 (ie, the gear 10228) is moved to the first support shaft. It rotates clockwise around 1011 (bearing 10222) in front view. When the first transmission member 1022 rotates clockwise with the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation, the support shaft 1044 supported by the bearing 10226 rotates clockwise with the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation. Move to.

  Further, when the gear 10228 rotates clockwise about the first support shaft 1011 in the front view, the power of the gear 10228 is transmitted to the gear 10244, and the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally to the right in the front view. Here, the second support shaft 1012 connected to the long hole 10242 and the third support shaft 1013 connected to the long hole 10246 function as a guide for moving the rack 1024 in a substantially horizontal direction. When the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally in the right direction when viewed from the front, this power is transmitted to the gear 10266, and the gear 10266 rotates clockwise around the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) as the center of rotation. When the gear 10266 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation, the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) as the center of rotation. When the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation in the front view, the support shaft 1046 supported by the bearing 10264 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation. Move to.

  Here, the gear 10228 and the gear 10266 have the same diameter, the distance from the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10222) to the support shaft 1044 (bearing 10226), and the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) to the support shaft. The distance to 1046 (bearing 10264) is the same. Therefore, when the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the support shaft 1044 and the support shaft 1046 are synchronized, and the clock is viewed from the front when the first support shaft 1011 and the fourth support shaft 1014 are the rotation centers, respectively. Operates around. As a result, the movable decorative body 1040 operates downward (that is, toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) while arcing clockwise in front view while maintaining a substantially horizontal state.

  When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the position detection gear 1068 that meshes with the third gear 1066 also rotates clockwise in front view with the center 10684 of the position detection gear 1068 as the center of rotation. Rotate. Although the position detection gear 1068 does not mesh with the fourth gear 1067, the fourth gear 1067 and the position detection gear 1068 have the same diameter, and both mesh with the third gear 1066. Therefore, the rotation angle of the fourth gear 1067 and the rotation angle of the position detection gear 1068 are the same, and the position of the position detection piece 10682 formed on the position detection gear 1068 is detected by the photosensor 1080, so that the fourth The rotation angle of the gear 1067 and thus the position of the movable decorative body 1040 can be detected.

  When the drive motor 1050 rotates and the motor output shaft 1052 rotates clockwise in front view, the movable decoration 1040 arcs counterclockwise in front view while maintaining a substantially horizontal state due to the reverse movement of the above movement. It moves upward while drawing.

  In this way, the movable decorative body 1040 can operate between the origin position and the operation limit position. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1040 from the origin position toward the front surface of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (movable body effect) is performed when the game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440. This is performed based on the result of the hit determination performed in step (b). On the other hand, the movement from the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 toward the origin position is performed when the movable body effect based on the result of the current hit determination is completed, and based on the result of the hit determination from the next time onward. It will prepare for the movable body effect to be performed.

[Composition of upper back part 1100]
With reference to FIGS. 81 to 87, the configuration of the upper back surface accessory 1100 will be described. FIG. 81 is an example of a front view of the upper back accessory 1100 in a normal mode (a mode when it is at the origin position). FIG. 82 is an example of a rear view of the upper back accessory 1100 in the normal mode. FIG. 83 is an example of a perspective view of the upper back surface accessory 1100 as seen from diagonally upward on the front right. FIG. 84 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back surface accessory 1100 as viewed from the front right and diagonally upward. FIG. 85 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 as viewed from the rear left (left in the front view) obliquely from above. 86A is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 82, and FIG. 86B is an example of an enlarged view of a portion X shown in FIG. 87A is an example of a cross-sectional view along the line BB shown in FIG. 82, and FIG. 87B is an example of an enlarged view of a Y portion shown in FIG.

  82 is a vertical line passing through the center of a bearing 11724 (described later) formed in an extending portion 11741 (described later) of the upper left arm 1172, and is shown in FIG. The BB line is a line that crosses the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the vertical direction.

  The upper back surface 1100 is made of a substantially flat metal, has a substantially frame shape without a lower side, and has a base member 1180 on which various members are attached, a left drive mechanism having a left motor 1151 and the like. 1150, a right drive mechanism 1160 having a right motor 1161, etc., a decorative cover 1130 that covers the left motor 1151, etc. from the front so that the player cannot see it, and a right cover 1161, etc. from the front so that the player cannot see the right motor 1161, etc. By a decorative cover 1140 to be covered, a left driving mechanism 1150 and a right driving mechanism 1160, a movable decorative body 1110 movable up and down, and a pair of left and right coated decorative bodies 1120 that are pivotally supported by the movable decorative body 1110 and movable. One end is connected to the base member 1180 and the other end is connected to the covering decorative body 1120. A pantograph mechanism 1170 that operates (shrinks in a substantially rhombus shape) as the movable decorative body 1110 moves up and down; a member that regulates the operation of the pantograph mechanism 1170 and that is attached to a substantially central portion of the base member 1180; A static decorative body 1196 that is a member having a decoration on the front surface and fixedly attached to the base member 1180 is provided.

  The base member 1180 includes a central plate portion 1182 extending in the left-right direction, a left vertical plate portion 1184 extending downward from the left end portion of the central plate portion 1182, and a right vertical plate portion extending downward from the right end portion of the central plate portion 1182. 1186.

  A static decorative body 1196 is attached to the front surface of the central plate portion 1182 as a decorative body that is decorated and does not operate. A horizontally elongated central plate 1188 is provided at the upper end of the center of the central plate portion 1182 so as to face upward. A front surface of the center plate 1188 has a pair of left support shaft 11882 and right support shaft 11884 that protrude forward.

  On the front surface of the central plate 1188, a regulating member 1190 is attached below the left and right support shafts 11882 and 11884 to restrict the pantograph mechanism 1170 from operating above a certain level. The regulating member 1190 is a trapezoidal plate member, and has a left contact surface 1192 that inclines toward the lower left and a right contact surface 1194 that inclines toward the lower right.

  The left vertical plate portion 1184 is configured such that the left motor attachment member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is attached can be attached. The left vertical plate portion 1184 is formed with a hole 11842 at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the left motor 1151 when the left motor attachment member 1152 is attached. Further, a left driven gear attachment shaft 11844 and a left transmission arm attachment shaft 11848 are formed on the front surface of the left vertical plate portion 1184. A substantially C-shaped hole 11846 is formed around the left driven gear attachment shaft 11844 in front view. The hole 11846 is formed corresponding to a locus along which a support shaft 11562 formed on the driven gear 1156 moves when a driven gear 1156 described later rotates.

  The right vertical plate portion 1186 is configured such that the right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is mounted can be mounted. A hole 11862 is formed in the right vertical plate portion 1186 at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the right motor 1161 when the right motor mounting member 1162 is mounted. A right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 and a right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 are formed on the front surface of the right vertical plate portion 1186. A substantially C-shaped hole 11866 is formed around the right driven gear attachment shaft 11864 in a front view. The hole 11866 is formed corresponding to a locus along which a support shaft 1162 formed on the driven gear 1166 moves when a driven gear 1166 described later rotates.

  The left drive mechanism 1150 includes a left motor 1151, a left motor attachment member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is attached, a drive gear 1157, a driven gear 1156, a left arm member 1155, and a left transmission arm 1154. Among these, the left arm member 1155, the driven gear 1156, and the drive gear 1157 function as a left drive transmission member that transmits power from the left motor 1151 to the left transmission arm 1154. The installation area of the left drive transmission member in the vertical direction (the operating direction of the movable decorative body 1110) is provided on the left outside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in a front view. It is smaller than the operating range. A hollow shaft 11544 formed at one end (right side) of the left transmission drive arm 1154 is pivotally supported by the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 in the installation area of the left drive transmission member.

  The left motor 1151 is a motor capable of normal rotation and reverse rotation. The left motor 1151 is attached to the left motor attachment member 1152. The left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted has a left vertical plate portion 1184 so that the output shaft of the left motor 1151 is coaxial with the drive gear 1157 and passes through a hole 11842 formed in the left vertical plate portion 1184. Attached to. Therefore, when the left motor 1151 rotates, the drive gear 1157 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the left motor 1151.

  The driven gear 1156 meshes with the drive gear 1157. When the drive gear 1157 rotates, the driven gear 1156 rotates in a direction opposite to the rotation direction. The driven gear 1156 is a gear having a larger diameter than the drive gear 1157. Thereby, the rotational force of the left motor 1151 transmitted from the drive gear 1157 is amplified. The driven gear 1156 has a bearing 11564 at the center and a support shaft 11562 at a predetermined distance from the center on the front surface. The driven gear 1156 is rotatably supported by a bearing 11564 on the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 so that the driven gear 1156 can rotate around the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844.

  The left arm member 1155 is a member that is generally anti-C-shaped (substantially C-shaped when viewed from the rear) when viewed from the front, has a left arm bearing 11552 at one end (the upper end on the paper surface), and the other end. The left arm support shaft 11554 is provided at the portion (the end on the lower side of the drawing). The left arm bearing 11552 is rotatably supported on a support shaft 11562 of the driven gear 1156.

  The left transmission arm 1154 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the left motor 1151 to the movable decorative body 1110 via the drive gear 1157, the driven gear 1156, and the left arm member 1155. The left transmission arm 1154 has a hollow shaft 11544 that protrudes forward at one end (left side), and has a long hole 11542 at the other end (center side). A boss 1112 described below (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decorative body 1110) is slidably connected to the elongated hole 11542 so as to support the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the left transmission arm 1154 includes a left arm bearing 11548 that is rotatably supported by the left arm support shaft 11554 of the left arm member 1155. The left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 rotates in the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 so that the left transmission arm 1154 can rotate (arc movement) about the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a center of rotation. It is pivotally supported. In addition, a coil spring 1153 is externally attached to the hollow shaft 11544 as an example of an elastic member that urges the left transmission arm 1154 counterclockwise (left rotation direction).

  The right drive mechanism 1160 includes a right motor 1161, a right motor attachment member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is attached, a drive gear 1167, a driven gear 1166, a right arm member 1165, and a right transmission arm 1164. Among these, the right arm member 1165, the driven gear 1166, and the drive gear 1167 function as right drive transmission members that transmit power from the right motor 1161 to the right transmission arm 1164. The installation area of the right drive transmission member in the vertical direction (the operating direction of the movable decorative body 1110) is provided on the right outside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in a front view, and in the vertical direction of the movable decorative body 1110. It is smaller than the operating range. The hollow shaft 11644 formed at one end (right side) of the right transmission drive arm 1164 is pivotally supported by the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 in the installation region of the right drive transmission member.

  The right motor 1161 is a motor capable of normal rotation and reverse rotation. The right motor 1161 is attached to the right motor attachment member 1162. The right motor attachment member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is attached is formed on the right vertical plate portion 1186 so that the output shaft of the right motor 1161 is coaxial with the drive gear 1167 and passes through the hole 11862 formed in the right vertical plate portion 1186. It is attached. Therefore, when the right motor 1161 rotates, the drive gear 1167 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the right motor 1161.

  The driven gear 1166 meshes with the drive gear 1167. When the drive gear 1167 rotates, the driven gear 1166 rotates in a direction opposite to the rotation direction. The driven gear 1166 is a gear having a larger diameter than the drive gear 1167. Thereby, the rotational force of the right motor 1161 transmitted from the drive gear 1167 is amplified. Further, the driven gear 1166 has a bearing 11664 at the center and a support shaft 1162 spaced from the center by a predetermined distance on the front surface. The driven gear 1166 is rotatably supported by the bearing 11664 on the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 so that the driven gear 1166 can rotate around the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864.

  The right arm member 1165 is a substantially C-shaped member (substantially C-shaped when viewed from the rear) when viewed from the front. The right arm support shaft 11654 is provided at the portion (the end on the lower side of the drawing). The right arm bearing 11652 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 1162 of the driven gear 1166.

  The right transmission arm 1164 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the right motor 1161 to the movable decorative body 1110 via the drive gear 1167, the driven gear 1166, and the right arm member 1165. The right transmission arm 1164 has a hollow shaft 11644 that protrudes forward at one end (right side), and has a long hole 11642 at the other end (center side). A boss 1114 (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decorative body 1110), which will be described later, is slidably coupled to the elongated hole 11642 so as to support the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the right transmission arm 1164 includes a right arm bearing 11648 that is rotatably supported by the right arm support shaft 11654 of the right arm member 1165. The right transmission arm 1164 rotates around the right transmission arm attachment shaft 11868 in the installation region of the right drive transmission member 11868 so that the right transmission arm attachment shaft 11868 can rotate (arc motion). It is pivotally supported. In addition, a coil spring 1163 is externally attached to the hollow shaft 11644 as an example of an elastic member that urges the right transmission arm 1164 clockwise (in the right rotation direction).

  In this way, the movable decorative body 1110 is supported from the left and right sides by the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164, and the power from the left motor 1154 and right motor 1161 is the left drive transmission member and right drive transmission member described above. Is communicating through.

  The pantograph mechanism 1170 includes a left upper arm 1172, a lower left arm 1174, an upper right arm 1176, and a lower right arm 1178. The pantograph mechanism 1170 has a substantially rhombus side formed by four arms, a left upper arm 1172, a left lower arm 1174, an upper right arm 1176, and a right lower arm 1178, and deforms the shape of the substantially rhombus (left upper arm 1172). And an angle formed by the left lower arm 1174 (an angle formed by the upper right arm 1176 and the right lower arm 1178) is changed. The upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 are made of a colorless and transparent resin. The lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin.

  The “substantially rhombus shape” includes, for example, two pairs of arms that are parallel to each other among the four arms of the upper left arm 1172, the lower left arm 1174, the upper right arm 1176, and the lower right arm 1178 (for example, the upper left arm). 4 arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178, and the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 have the same length. Cases of shapes and squares are also envisaged. Of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178, for example, two sets of facing arms have the same length (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 have the same length, the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right portion The arms 1176 may or may not be the same length. Further, for example, one of the two opposing arms has the same length and the other arm. Different lengths may be used. That is, the lengths of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are not limited to specific lengths, and various variations can be employed. Further, considering that each arm, that is, an accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) operates, it is not always necessary for the arms facing each other to be parallel, and the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120). It may be in a form in which the arms facing each other change from a non-parallel state to a parallel state in accordance with the driving, or a form in which the arms change from a parallel state to a non-parallel state. In addition, regarding the above-mentioned “arms facing each other in parallel”, it may be difficult to obtain complete parallelism in consideration of the structure when the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) is driven. Since it is assumed, it is considered to be parallel (substantially parallel) if the inclination directions of the arms facing each other are in the same direction. Even if each of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 has a different length, the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) can be moved (for example, the operation limit position from the origin position). The lengths of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be variously changed.

  The upper left arm 1172 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is a horizontally long flat plate shape along a virtual plane substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and has a bearing 11722 at the center end, The part has a bearing 11724. The bearing 11722 is rotatably supported on the left support shaft 11882.

  The left lower arm 1174 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is a horizontally long flat plate shape along a virtual plane substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and the left end has a position exceeding the upper end 11743 of the long portion. An extending portion 11741 extending upward (upper left arm 1172 side) is formed. The thickness of the extending portion 11741 in the front-rear direction is smaller than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction. A support shaft 11742 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the extending portion 11741 at a position above the upper end 11743 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174. In addition, a hollow shaft 11744 is formed at the center end of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction.

  The upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are connected to each other by rotatably supporting a bearing 11724 on a support shaft 11742. The upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are connected to each other at the origin position (the position at which the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are both horizontal, for example, the mode shown in FIG. 82). Except for the bearing 11724 and the support shaft 11742), they are arranged side by side substantially in parallel without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions of the left upper arm 1172 and the left lower arm 1174 (portions excluding the bearing 11724 and the support shaft 11742) are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side. Thereby, the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. The hollow shaft 11744 passes through the long hole 11104 of the movable decorative body 1110 and is supported by the guide shaft 11224. The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174.

  The upper right arm 1176 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is a horizontally long flat plate shape along a virtual plane that is substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction. The portion has a bearing 11764. The bearing 11762 is rotatably supported on the right support shaft 11884.

  The lower right arm 1178 is a horizontally long flat plate that has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and extends along a virtual plane substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction. The right end of the right lower arm 1178 is located above the upper end 11783 of the longitudinal portion. An extending portion 11781 extending upward (to the right lower arm 1178 side) is formed. The thickness of the extending portion 11781 in the front-rear direction is smaller than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction. The extending portion 11781 is provided with a support shaft 11782 extending in the front-rear direction at a position above the upper end 11783 of the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178. Further, a hollow shaft 11784 is formed at the center side end of the lower right arm 1178 in the front-rear direction.

  The upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other by a bearing 11764 that is rotatably supported on a support shaft 11782. The upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other at the origin position (the position in which the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are both horizontal, for example, the mode shown in FIG. 82). Except for 11764 and the support shaft 11782), they are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 (portions excluding the bearing 11764 and the support shaft 11782) are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side. Thereby, the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction is within the thickness range of the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161. The hollow shaft 11784 passes through the long hole 11108 of the movable decorative body 1110 and is supported by the guide shaft 11244. The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178.

  In the above description, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 have been described as having the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172 and 1174 disposed on substantially the same plane as viewed from the side. A detailed positional relationship between 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction will be described.

  In the upper left arm 1172, the forefront position in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the longitudinal portion is F1, and the rearmost position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion is B1 (see FIGS. 86 and 87). Further, in the lower left arm 1174, the forefront position in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the longitudinal portion is F2, and the rearmost position in the front-rear direction is B2 (see FIGS. 86 and 87). Here, the forefront position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction is located rearward of the forefront position F2 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction, and the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 The rearmost surface position B1 in the front-rear direction is located on the rear side of the rearmost surface position B2 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174. However, the rearmost position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction is the rearmost position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the rearmost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 It is located in front of the surface position B1 (between the forefront position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 and the rearmost surface position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172). That is, when the left upper arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are viewed in a cross section perpendicularly crossing the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172 and 1174, the thickness portions of the arms 1172 and 1174 are in the vertical direction (the width direction of each arm). ) (Positional relationship in which the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172 and 1174 are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side).

  In the present embodiment, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 are disposed on substantially the same plane as viewed from the side, but in detail, more than the lower left arm 1174. The upper left arm 1172 is configured to be slightly rearward. However, instead of this, the upper left arm 1172 may be slightly positioned on the front side of the lower left arm 1174. That is, in the present embodiment, the forefront position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 is located behind the forefront position F2 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction. The rearmost surface position B1 of the longitudinal portion of 1172 in the front-rear direction is positioned rearward of the rearmost surface position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction, and the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction The position B2 is configured to be positioned behind the forefront position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 and ahead of the rearmost position B1 of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction. Instead, the forefront position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction is the upper left arm. The rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 is positioned rearward of the frontmost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of 172, and the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 is greater than the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176. The rearmost position of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction is located behind the frontmost position in the front-rear direction of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction and the front-rear direction of the long portion of the left lower arm 1174 (The last surface position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 is the foremost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 and the longitudinal position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction) You may comprise so that it may be located in the same plane.

  In the present embodiment, the rearmost position B2 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 is rearward of the forefront position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal position of the upper left arm 1172. Positioned in front of the last surface position B1 in the front-rear direction of the portion (between the foremost position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 and the last surface position B1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172) doing. However, instead of this, the total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (from the position of the frontmost arm to the position of the rearmost arm of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174) As long as the thickness can be reduced, the position of the last surface of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction and the position of the last surface of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction may be substantially flush. The forefront position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction and the forefront position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction may be substantially flush. Furthermore, the position of the rearmost surface in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 and the position of the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction are substantially flush with each other. The forefront position in the front-rear direction and the forefront position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 are substantially flush (that is, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are substantially on the same plane). You may do it.

  Note that the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 in the front-rear direction is the same as the positional relationship between the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In this way, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 (the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 and the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178) are moved in the vertical direction (the width direction of each arm). The total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178) without reducing the thickness of each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178. The thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 from the frontmost position to the rearmost position in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the area occupied by the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. When a pachinko gaming machine is installed in a pachinko hall, the length in the front-rear direction is limited. Objects can be arranged, and a dynamic movable effect using a plurality of objects overlapping in the front-rear direction can be executed.

  In the contracted state of the pantograph mechanism 1170, the extending portion 11741 extends upward to a position exceeding the upper end 11743 of the left lower arm 1174, so that the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are at the origin position. It becomes a substantially horizontal state. Similarly, since the extending portion 11781 extends upward to a position exceeding the upper end 11783 of the lower right arm 1178, the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are substantially horizontal at the origin position. Since the extension portion 11741 (extension portion 11781) is formed, the movable range by the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (upper right arm 1176 and right lower arm 1178) can be further increased. Become. Moreover, since each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be made thick, the strength of each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 is increased, and stability during operation is brought about. Furthermore, it becomes possible to increase the strength of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178, thereby increasing the size of the movable accessory that operates in accordance with the operation of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178. And a more dynamic movable effect can be executed.

  As described above, the positional relationship between the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) is as described above. It is possible to execute the dynamic movable effect used and the dynamic movable effect by increasing the size of the movable accessory, and it is possible to further enhance the game entertainment by the movable effect.

  The movable decorative body 1110 is decorated on the front surface, and openings 1101 and 1105 are formed at positions that are substantially symmetrical. Lenses 1103 and 1107 are fitted in these openings 1101 and 1105, respectively. The movable decorative body 1110 can slide up and down by the left driving mechanism 1150 and the right driving mechanism 1160 together with the covering decorative body 1120. The movable decorative body 1110 has a hole 11102, a long hole 11104, a hole 11106 and a long hole 11108, and a boss 1112 and a boss 1114. The hole 11102 and the hole 11106 are holes provided at positions that are substantially bilaterally symmetrical to each other. The elongated hole 11104 and the hole 11106 are provided at positions that are substantially symmetrical with each other, and are elongated elongated holes. The boss 1112 and the boss 1114 are provided at positions that are substantially symmetrical with each other on the back surface side of the movable decorative body 1110. In addition, the movable decorative body 1110 is provided with an LED substrate 1116 on which a large number of LEDs are arranged behind the lenses 1103 and 1107, and is configured to emit light according to the progress of the game. When the LED arranged on the LED substrate 1116 emits light, the light is displayed through the lenses 1103 and 1107.

  The covering decoration body 1120 includes a covering decoration body 1122 disposed on the left side of the movable decoration body 1110 and a covering decoration body 1124 disposed on the right side of the movable decoration body 1110. The covering decorative body 1122 has a support shaft 11222 and a guide shaft 11224. The covering decorative body 1124 includes a support shaft 11242 and a guide shaft 11244.

  In the covering decorative body 1122, the support shaft 11222 is rotatably supported in the hole 11102 of the movable decorative body 1110, and the guide shaft 11224 is slidably inserted into the elongated hole 11104 of the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the covering decoration body 1122 is connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (specifically, the covering decoration body 1122 is rotatably supported by a bearing 11744 at an end portion on the center side of the left lower arm 1174). Thereby, the covering decorative body 1122 covers the front surface (lens 1103) of the movable decorative body 1110, and is disposed so as to be movable with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 about the support shaft 11222 as a rotation center.

  In the covering decorative body 1124, the support shaft 11242 is rotatably supported in the hole 11106 of the movable decorative body 1110, and the guide shaft 11244 is slidably inserted into the elongated hole 11108 of the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the covering decoration body 1124 is connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (specifically, the covering decoration body 1124 is rotatably supported by a bearing 11784 at an end portion on the center side of the lower right arm 1178). As a result, the covered decorative body 1124 covers the front surface (lens 1107) of the movable decorative body 1110, and is disposed so as to be movable with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 about the support shaft 11242.

  In addition, the covering decoration body 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124 are arrange | positioned so that it may become substantially left-right symmetric with respect to each other.

[Explanation of the operation of the upper back part 1100]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 92, the operation of the upper back surface accessory 1100 will be described. FIGS. 88A and 88B are diagrams showing an example of the upper back accessory 1100 in the normal mode (a mode at the origin position) before the operation starts, in which FIG. 88A is a front view and FIG. 88B is a rear view. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of a mode before the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit position after the upper back surface actor 1100 starts to operate. Is a front view, and (B) is a rear view. FIGS. 90A and 90B are diagrams showing an example of a mode when the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit positions, where FIG. 90A is a front view and FIG. 90B is a rear view. . In FIG. 91, after the left upper arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 are operated to the operation limit position, the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 are further rotated, and the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are movable decorations. It is a figure which shows an example when the body 1110 act | operates toward the paper surface lower side (when the covering decoration body 1120 starts an action | operation with respect to the movable decoration body 1110), Comprising: (A) is a front view, (B ) Is a rear view. FIGS. 92A and 92B are diagrams illustrating an example of a state in which the covering decorative body 1120 has moved to the operating limit with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, where FIG. 92A is a front view and FIG. 92B is a rear view.

  As shown in FIG. 88, when the upper back surface 1100 is at the origin position, the pantograph mechanism 1170 is closed (the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are substantially horizontal). is there. Here, regarding the members (the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178) that can be hidden by the movable decorative body 1110 when the movable decorative body 1110 operates downward in the drawing, the back surface of the movable decorative body 1110 The members (the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176) that are difficult to conceal with the movable decorative body 1110 are made of colorless and transparent members. Thereby, there is little possibility that visual recognition of the image displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 is less likely to be noticed by the player.

  Then, as the movable decorative body 1110 operates downward in the drawing, the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176 change their postures in the vertical direction, and the upper arms 1172, 1176 and the lower arms 1174, 1178 The angle formed by increases. When the movable decorative body 1110 operates toward the lower side of the drawing, the longitudinal direction of the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 is directed in the vertical direction, but until the movable decorative body 1110 exceeds a certain operating range, The lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 remain positioned on the back side of the movable decorative body 1110.

  When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the drive gear 1157 also rotates counterclockwise. When the drive gear 1157 rotates counterclockwise, the driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise. The support shaft 11562 is located above the paper surface when it is at the origin position (when the movable decoration body 1110 and the covering decoration body 1120 are at the origin position), and when the driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise, the bearing 11564 (left It rotates around the driven gear mounting shaft 11844) clockwise. When the support shaft 11562 rotates around the bearing 11564 (left driven gear attachment shaft 11844) in the clockwise direction, the left arm member 1155 is pushed down toward the lower left. When the left arm member 1155 is pushed down to the lower left, a clockwise pressing force with the hollow shaft 11544 (the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848) as the rotation center acts on the left transmission arm 1154. When a clockwise pressing force about the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 acts on the left transmission arm 1154, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise with the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a fulcrum. When the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise, the boss 1112 slidably connected to the elongated hole 11542 moves in the elongated hole 11542 and moves the movable decorative body 1110 downward.

  When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in front view, the drive gear 1167 also rotates clockwise. When the drive gear 1167 rotates clockwise, the driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise. When the support shaft 1162 is at the origin position (when the movable decoration body 1110 and the covering decoration body 1120 are at the origin position), it is positioned above the paper surface. When the driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise, the bearing 11664 ( Rotate counterclockwise around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868). When the support shaft 1162 rotates counterclockwise around the bearing 11664 (the right driven gear attachment shaft 11864), the right arm member 1165 is pushed downward toward the lower right. When the right arm member 1165 is pushed down to the lower right, a counterclockwise pressing force with the hollow shaft 11644 (the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868) as the rotation center acts on the right transmission arm 1164. When a counterclockwise pressing force about the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 acts on the right transmission arm 1164, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 as a fulcrum. . When the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 1114 slidably connected to the elongated hole 11642 moves in the elongated hole 11642 and moves the movable decorative body 1110 downward.

  When the movable ornament 1110 moves downward, the cover ornaments 1122 and 1124 also move downward accompanying the movement of the movable ornament 1110. This is because the guide shafts 11224 and 11244 of the covering decorative bodies 1122 and 1124 are slidably inserted into the elongated holes 11104 and 11108 of the movable decorative body 1110, so that when the movable decorative body 1110 moves downward, the gravity This is because the covering decorative bodies 1122 and 1124 also move downward due to the action.

  When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 are maintained in a substantially horizontal state while maintaining the substantially horizontal state. Operates downward.

  When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 move downward in the drawing, the lower central hollow shaft 1744 connected to the covering decorative body 1122 moves downward in the drawing. Pushed down towards. As a result, the lower left arm 1174 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 11742, and the upper left arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise around the bearing 11722 (center left support shaft 11882). When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in front view and the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 move downward on the paper surface, the hollow shaft 11784 connected to the covering decorative body 1124 is pushed downward on the paper surface. It is done. As a result, the lower right arm 1178 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 11782 and the upper right arm 1176 rotates clockwise about the bearing 11762 (center right support shaft 11884). In this way, the pantograph mechanism 1170 operates.

  By the way, when the left upper arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise with the bearing 11722 (center left support shaft 11882) as a fulcrum, it eventually contacts the left contact surface 1192 of the regulating member 1190. Further, when the upper right arm 1176 rotates clockwise around the bearing 11762 (the center right support shaft 11884), the right upper arm 1176 eventually contacts the right contact surface 1194 of the restriction member 1190. The upper left arm 1172 is an operation limit position in which the position when contacting the left contact surface 1192 is directed downward in the drawing, and the upper right arm 1176 is positioned when contacting the right contact surface 1194. The operation limit position is directed downward.

  After the left upper arm 1172 moves to the operation limit position, when the left motor 1151 further rotates counterclockwise in front view, the movable decorative body 1110 further moves downward in the drawing, and the hollow shaft 11744 Move from the lower end position toward the upper end position. Along with this, the covering decorative body 1122 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 11222 as a fulcrum. When the right motor 1161 further rotates clockwise in front view after the upper right arm 1176 has moved to the operation limit position, the movable decorative body 1110 further moves downward in the drawing, and the hollow shaft 11784 has the elongated hole 11108. It moves from the lower end position to the upper end position. Along with this, the covering decorative body 1124 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 11242 as a fulcrum. Thus, the covering decoration body 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124 operate together with the movable decoration body 1110 from the origin position toward the lower side of the drawing, and the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 move toward the lower side of the drawing. When the movable decorative body 1110 operates to the limit position and further moves downward in the drawing, the covering decorative body 1120 operates relative to the movable decorative body 1110. When the covering decorative body 1120 is operated relative to the movable decorative body 1110, the lenses 1103 and 1107 fitted in the openings 1101 and 1105 are exposed and can be visually recognized by the player. The exposure amount of the lenses 1103 and 1107 increases as the relative operating range of the covering decorative body 1120 with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 increases.

  As described above, the upper back surface accessory 1100 is movable in the vertical direction between the origin position (see FIG. 88) and the descending end position (see FIG. 90). Specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 can move between the origin position and the descending end position, and the covering decorative body 1120 is between the origin position and the operation limit positions of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176. Can be moved. The operating limit position is that the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 move to the lower end position, and then the movable decorative body 1110 is at the lower end position, and the covering decorative body 1120 reaches the limit with respect to the movable decorative body 1110. The activated position. That is, the vertical position of the movable decorative body 1110 is the same at the lower end position and the operation limit position. When the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 are at the origin position, they are waiting at a position that does not hinder the viewing of the image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the other hand, when the upper back accessory 1100 (specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120) is in the lowered end position, the liquid crystal display device 16 includes the case where the covered decorative body 1120 is in the operation limit position. Located in front of the display area. That is, when the upper back surface 1100 at the origin position moves toward the descending end position, the upper back surface 1100 (the movable decoration body 1110 and the covering decoration body 1120) moves from the origin position to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It will advance to the front. The advancement of the upper back actor 1100 from the origin position toward the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 advances the game (for example, the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first start port 762 or the second start port 752 ) Is executed according to the result of the hit determination executed under the condition of).

  When the upper back part 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the upper right arm 1176 and the upper left arm 1172 are exposed to positions that can be seen by the player. Since the upper left arm 1172 is made of a transparent resin, it does not hinder the viewing of the effect image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In addition, since the upper back accessory 1100 (specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) is moved up and down by the pantograph mechanism, the fulcrum of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178, and the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm The fulcrum with the part arm 1174 is on the side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and is not likely to obstruct the player's visual recognition (the player tends to watch the center part), as well as the left drive mechanism. 1150 and the right drive mechanism 1160 can be provided compactly in a range smaller than the vertical movable range of the upper back surface accessory 1100. Although the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin, even if the upper back part 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm Since the arm 1178 moves so as to be hidden behind the movable decorative body 1110, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are less likely to enter the player's view. Further, by reducing the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction, it is possible to reduce the thickness of the upper back part 1100 as a whole (in this embodiment, the thickness of the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 is approximately equal to the width). ing).

  In addition, when the movable decorative body 1110 starts operating, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 start to operate from the origin position, and the decorative decorative body 1120 (covered decorative body) is moved to the movable decorative body 1110 from the middle. 1122 and the covering ornament 1124) will start to operate relatively. That is, when the movable decorative body 1110 starts to operate, the covering decorative body 1120 does not operate with respect to the movable decorative body 1110. It is difficult to predict the final shape, and the movable decorative body 1110 performs an operation that exceeds the player's expectation from the middle, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

  In this embodiment, at the beginning of the operation of the movable decorative body 1110, the covering decorative body 1120 (the covering decorative body 1122 and the covering decorative body 1124) is not operated with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, and is movable from the middle. The cover decoration body 1120 is configured to start operation relative to the decoration body 1110. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover decoration body 1120 operates regardless of the position of the movable decoration body 1110. It may be.

  By the way, after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 contact the left contact surface 1192 and the right contact surface 1194 (after reaching the operation limit position), the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 further rotate. Even so, the posture of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 (the direction in which the longitudinal portions of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 are directed) does not change. On the other hand, for the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178, after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 abut on the left abutment surface 1192 and the right abutment surface 1194, respectively, The longitudinal portions of the arms 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction. When the longitudinal portions of the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction, the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 will eventually be exposed from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, before the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 are exposed from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110, the movable decorative body 1110 is covered with the covering decorative body 1120 (covered decorative body 1122). And the covering decorative body 1124) are operated relatively. That is, when the movable decorative body 1110 operates downward in the drawing, the longitudinal portions of the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction. The right lower arm 1178 appears in a position where it can be seen in front view. At that timing, the covering decorative body 1120 is operated relatively upward with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, and the left lower arm 1174 and the lower right arm The arm 1178 is positioned on the back side of the covering decorative body 1120. When the covering decoration body 1120 is operated relative to the movable decoration body 1110, the accessory area (area combining the movable decoration body 1110 and the covering decoration body 1120) that can be visually recognized in front view becomes large. Thus, even if the longitudinal portions of the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction, the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 Preventing exposure.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, after the upper back surface actor 1100 at the origin position starts operating toward the lowered end position, the left upper arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 are respectively left contact surfaces. When abutting on 1192 and the right abutment surface 1194, the movable decorative body 1110 continues to operate toward the lowered end position, and the movable decorative body 1110 is covered with the covering decorative body 1120 (the covering decorative body 1122 and the covering decorative body). The body 1124) operates upward. Here, the operation of the covering decorative body 1122 with respect to the movable decorative body 1100 is performed by one operation control such as rotating the left motor 1151 counterclockwise in front view. Similarly, the operation of the covering decorative body 1124 with respect to the movable decorative body 1100 is performed by one operation control such as rotating the right motor 1161 clockwise in front view. That is, for each of the covering decoration body 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124, the motors corresponding to the respective elements (the left motor 1151 for the covering decoration body 1122 and the right motor 1161 for the covering decoration body 1124) are simply rotated in a specific direction. With one simple operation control, it is possible to operate the movable decorative body 1100 independently of the operation of the movable decorative body 1100 while continuing the operation of the movable decorative body 1100. In addition, since both the cover decoration body 1122 and the cover decoration body 1124 each rotate only one motor, the movable decoration body 1100 can be operated while the operation of the movable decoration body 1100 is continued with a simple configuration and space saving. It becomes possible to operate independently of the operation. In particular, in recent years, it has become a mainstream to increase the size of movable accessories and to arrange a plurality of movable accessories, so that the contribution to space saving is a significant effect.

  By the way, conventionally, when operating an accessory in a substantially straight line in the vertical direction, a drive mechanism is provided on both sides of the accessory, and the drive mechanism performs a linear motion in the vertical direction. When the drive mechanisms are provided on both sides of the accessory, it is necessary to provide the drive mechanism at least over the operating range of the accessory in the vertical direction, and a large area is required to install the drive mechanism. Space saving can be achieved if the accessory can be operated by the arc motion, but in this case, the accessory is also operated by the arc motion. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise around the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a fulcrum, and the boss 1112 slidably connected to the long hole 11542 moves in the long hole 11542. Meanwhile, the movable decorative body 1110 is moved downward. In synchronization with this, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 as a fulcrum, and the boss 1114 slidably connected to the elongated hole 11642 moves within the elongated hole 11642. Meanwhile, the movable decorative body 1110 is moved downward. That is, according to the present embodiment, each of the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 performs an arc motion with one end as a fulcrum, while maintaining the posture of the movable decorative body 1110 substantially horizontal, The movable decorative body 1110 can be moved substantially linearly in the vertical direction over an operating range larger than the installation area of the drive mechanism. Moreover, since the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 perform an arc motion, the installation area in the vertical direction of the drive mechanisms (the left drive mechanism 1150 and the right drive mechanism 1160) for driving the movable decoration body 1110 is defined as the movable decoration body 1110. The operating range can be made smaller than that, which can greatly contribute to space saving.

  In the present embodiment, the movable ornament 1110, the covering ornament 1120, the ornament cover 1130, the ornament cover 1140, the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164, and the static ornament 1196 have the same type of ornament on the front surface. Is given. The same type of decoration means, for example, a decoration that recalls the same idea, and the same idea can be recalled if a decoration that can be recognized as having the same color, pattern, and shape is applied. In the present embodiment, the members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, 1196, and 1196 have the same appearance in appearance and form that forms the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100). The decoration is recognizable. Moreover, since the upper back part 1100 has a character shape related to the concept of the gaming machine, it is the same by the members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, 1196 with the same type of decoration on the front side. A character shape is formed.

  In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in particular, a support member that supports a movable member (corresponding to the movable decorative body 1110 of the present embodiment) and a drive member that drives the movable member (left transmission of the present embodiment). As for the arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164), there is a possibility that the movable accessory can be seen in front view when the movable accessory advances to the front side of the liquid crystal display device. In this regard, in this embodiment, unlike such a conventional gaming machine, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are intentionally visible in front view, and then other members (movable decorative body 1110). The player is recognized as a member constituting the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100) together with the covering ornament 1120, the ornament covers 1130 and 1140, and the static ornament 1196). Moreover, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are assimilated with the other members no matter where the movable decorative body 1110 is located between the origin position and the operation limit position by the operation (for example, 88-92 (see (A)). More specifically, the left transmission arm 1154 is decorated to provide continuity between the movable decorative body 1110 and the decorative cover 1130, and the right transmission arm 1164 has a movable decorative body 1110 and a decorative cover. The decoration which gives continuity between 1140 is given. Moreover, the same type of decoration is applied to the front surfaces of the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164 and the other members to form one character. In this way, while the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are intentionally visible in front view, the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are connected to the movable decorative body 1110 to support the movable decorative body 1110. It is difficult for the player to grasp that the member is a member to be played. Furthermore, the movable decorative body 1110 is shaped like an eye, whereas the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are shaped to image the corners of the eyes from the left and right ends of the movable decorative body 1110. . For this reason, it seems that it is even more difficult for the player to grasp that the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are members that drive the movable decorative body 1110.

[Composition of lower part 1200]
The configuration of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 98. FIG. 93 is an example of a front view of the lower accessory 1200 in a normal mode (a mode when it is at the origin position). FIG. 94 is an example of a rear view of the lower accessory 1200 in the normal mode. FIG. 95 is an example of a perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as seen from diagonally upward on the front right. FIG. 96 is an example of a rear perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed obliquely from the upper left. FIG. 97 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as seen from diagonally upward on the front right. FIG. 98 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed from the rear left (left in the front view) obliquely from above.

  The lower accessory 1200 includes a lower accessory fixed base 1220 to which various members constituting the lower accessory 1200 are attached, a lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 configured to be operable with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220, A left guide 1260 member and a right guide 1270 member for guiding the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 on both the left and right sides, and an auxiliary for applying an upward biasing force to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moving up and down Lower arm driving motor 1230 as a driving source for operating arm 1280, lower accessory moving decorative body 1210 with respect to lower accessory fixing base 1220, and the power of lower accessory driving motor 1230 are movable in the lower tool A gear 1240 for transmitting to the decorative body 1210 and a transparent resin rear cover 1250 disposed behind the gear 1240 are provided. Although the rear cover 1250 is made of a transparent resin, various members such as the gear 1240 are not shown in FIGS. 94 and 96 so that the shape of the rear cover 1250 can be easily grasped. The lower accessory fixed base 1220 and the lower accessory drive motor 1230 function as an operating mechanism that moves the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 up and down.

  The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is a horizontally long plate-shaped member. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A lower accessory driving motor 1230 is attached to a substantially lower center of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 on the front side. A support shaft 12202 that pivotally supports the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed on the left side of the front surface of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to face forward. A pair of left and right support shafts 12203 and 12205 are formed on the back side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to face rearward. The lower accessory fixed base 1220 has a pair of semicircular holes 12204 and 12206 which are substantially symmetrical with respect to the lower accessory drive motor 1230 and bulge outwardly above the lower accessory drive motor 1230. Is formed. The hole 12204 is formed so as to draw an arc centered on the support shaft 12203. The hole 12206 is formed so as to draw an arc centered on the support shaft 12205. A photo sensor 12208 for detecting the position of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is disposed on the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and on the right side of the lower accessory driving motor 1230. In the present embodiment, the photosensor 12208 detects whether or not the lower accessory movable ornament 1210 is at the origin position.

  The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is a decorative member that is long in the lateral direction. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is attached to the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so that the lower accessory fixing base 1220 can operate in the vertical direction. The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 includes a lower accessory movable base 12102 made of a transparent resin that can be operated in the vertical direction with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220 and a lower accessory fixed base 1220 that is decorated on the front surface. And a lower accessory decorative cover 12104 that moves up and down together with the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory decorative cover 12104 is configured to transmit light from the rear toward the front.

  A pair of elongated holes 12106 and 12108 are formed on the left and right sides of the lower accessory movable base 12102. The elongated holes 12106 and 12108 are elongated holes that are long in the lateral direction. A boss 12110 that engages with the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102 toward the front on the right side of the elongated hole 12106.

  Further, the lower accessory movable base 12102 is mounted on the front side with an LED substrate on which LEDs (not shown) as light emitting sources are arranged. When the LED arranged on the LED substrate emits light, it emits light forward through the lower accessory decoration cover 12104. Thereby, for example, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in accordance with the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210.

  The left guide member 1260 is a vertically long plate-like member, and is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at the attachment portions 12604 and 12606. The left guide member 1260 is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixed base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 with the lower accessory fixed base 1220. A groove formed between the left guide member 1260 and the lower accessory fixed base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220. .

  The right guide member 1270 is a vertically long plate-like member, and is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at the attachment portions 12704 and 12706. The right guide member 1270 is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixed base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 with the lower accessory fixed base 1220. The groove formed between the right guide member 1270 and the lower accessory fixed base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220. .

  The auxiliary arm 1280 is a bar-like member provided on the front left side of the lower accessory decorative cover 12104. The auxiliary arm 1280 has a bearing 12804 supported on the support shaft 12202 of the lower accessory fixed base 1220 at the left end. The auxiliary arm 1280 is formed with a long hole 12802 that engages with a boss 12110 formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102 at the right end.

  An auxiliary coil spring 1290 is provided as an example of an elastic member between a support shaft 12202 formed on the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and a bearing 12804 formed on the auxiliary arm 1280. The auxiliary coil spring 1290 urges the auxiliary arm 1280 counterclockwise (counterclockwise direction) with the bearing 12804 (support shaft 12202) as the center of rotation. The upward movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220 is assisted by the counterclockwise biasing force of the auxiliary coil spring 1290.

  The lower accessory driving motor 1230 is a stepping motor, and its rotation is controlled by a pulse signal from the accessory control circuit 207.

  The gear 1240 is provided behind the lower accessory fixing base 1220. The gear 1240 includes a drive gear 12402 provided coaxially with the lower accessory drive motor 1230, a left driven gear 12404, and a right driven gear 12406.

  The left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter, so that the height direction position of the rotation center of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the rotation center of the right driven gear 12406 are the left and right. They are arranged side by side. Also, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in opposite directions in synchronization with each other.

  The left driven gear 12404 has a bearing 12404a at the center. The bearing 12404a rotatably supports the support shaft 12203. The teeth of the left driven gear 12404 mesh with the teeth of the drive gear 12402. The right driven gear 12406 has a bearing 12406a at the center. The bearing 12406a rotatably supports the support shaft 12205. The teeth of the right driven gear 12406 mesh with the teeth of the left driven gear 12404 and do not mesh with the teeth of the drive gear 12402. That is, the rotational force of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 is transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 through the drive gear 12402, and the rotational force transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 is further transmitted to the right driven gear 12406. In this way, the rotation of the drive gear 12402 and the right driven gear 12406 rotates in synchronization.

  The left driven gear 12404 has a boss 12405 formed on the front surface thereof at a position that is a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the center of the left driven gear 12404. Similarly, with respect to the right driven gear 12406, a boss 12407 is formed on the front surface at a position that is a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the center of the right driven gear 12406. The distance from the center of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 is the same as the distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407.

  Note that “the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter”, “the height direction position of the center of the left driven gear 12404 is the same as the height direction position of the center of the right driven gear 12406” and “the left driven gear. “The distance from the center of the gear 12404 to the boss 12405 and the distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 are the same” are not so precise that it is required to have the same value after the decimal point. In addition, when the power of the lower accessory driving motor 1230 is transmitted to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is stably maintained with a good balance in the left-right direction while maintaining the same appearance. What is necessary is just to be in the range in which a colleague is transmitted substantially equally to the left and right of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 so that it can move up and down.

  The boss 12405 passes through a hole 12204 formed in the lower accessory fixed base 1220 and is slidably connected to an elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Here, the hole 12204 is formed corresponding to a locus in which the boss 12405 rotates around the support shaft 12203 when the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise.

  The boss 12407 passes through a hole 12206 formed in the lower accessory fixed base 1220 and is slidably connected to an elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Here, the hole 12206 is formed corresponding to a locus in which the boss 12407 rotates around the support shaft 12205 when the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise.

  In the normal state, the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 are respectively located at the lowermost lowermost position (position shown in FIG. 99).

  Note that the hole 12204 and the hole 12206 also have a function of defining the movement range of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 (that is, the rotation range of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406), respectively.

  When the uppermost position of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 when the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are rotated is the uppermost position, both the hole 12204 and the hole 12206 are at least the lowermost position and the uppermost position. The bosses 12405 and 12407 need to be formed so as to be able to move between them. In the present embodiment, the hole 12404 is formed from the lowermost position (see FIG. 99) to a position exceeding the uppermost position in the clockwise direction. Further, the hole 12206 is formed from the lowermost position (see FIG. 99) counterclockwise to a position exceeding the uppermost position.

  Here, among the two positions where the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 and the hole 12204 intersect, the upper side is the uppermost end position of the boss 12405 and the lower side is the lowermost position of the boss 12405. Of the two positions where the vertical direction line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 and the hole 12206 intersect, the upper side is the uppermost position of the boss 12407 and the lower side is the lowermost position of the boss 12407 (whichever FIG. 101). However, in FIG. 101, both the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 have moved to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost end position.

  Note that the “position slightly exceeding the top end position” for the boss 12405 is the right side in front view (on the right side of FIG. 101A, FIG. The left side of (B) is a position where the substantially uppermost end position can be maintained. Further, the “position exceeding the uppermost end position” of the boss 12407 is a front left side (on the left side in FIG. 101A, FIG. 101B on the left side in FIG. ) Right side). However, it is preferable that the degree of “exceeding position” is so small that it is difficult to recognize that the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 has moved down when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves upward. This is because if the bosses 12405 and 12407 greatly exceed the uppermost end position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 descends to a position lower than the uppermost end position.

[Description of operation of lower actor 1200]
Next, the operation of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 99A and 99B are diagrams showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 before the operation is started, that is, in a normal mode (a mode at the origin position), where FIG. 99A is a front view and FIG. 99B is a rear view. FIGS. 100A and 100B are diagrams showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when operated to an intermediate position, where FIG. 100A is a front view and FIG. 100B is a rear view. FIGS. 101A and 101B are diagrams showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when operating up to the operating limit, where FIG. 101A is a front view and FIG. 101B is a rear view. In FIG. 101, the bosses 12407 and the long holes 12108 are illustrated so as to be understood.

  The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is movable in the vertical direction between the origin position (see FIG. 99) and the operation limit position (see FIG. 101). When the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the origin position, it is hidden behind the center unit 74, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize it. On the other hand, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is in the operation limit position, it is positioned in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 at the origin position moves toward the operation limit position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is directed forward from the center unit 74 toward the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Will advance. The advancement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 from the rear of the center unit 74 toward the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 advances the game (for example, a game to the first start port 762 or the second start port 752). This is executed according to the result of the hit determination executed on the condition that the ball is won (passed).

  When the lower accessory driving motor 1230 rotates counterclockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise, the boss 12405 positioned at the lowermost position in the normal state rotates clockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is a linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. Move to rotate. When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the lowermost boss 12407 in the normal state is countered while drawing an arc whose radius is a linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407. Rotate clockwise. That is, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 rises toward the operation limit position.

  While the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the origin position (see FIG. 99) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 100), the boss 12405 moves leftward in the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102 ( The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward while moving in the right direction in FIGS. 99 (B) and 100 (B). The boss 12407 moves the lower accessory movable base 12102 upward while moving in the right direction (leftward in FIGS. 99B and 100B) in the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Push up. At this time, the hole 12204 and the hole 12206 function as guide grooves for guiding the operation of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407, respectively. 12406 (rotation range of 12406).

  In addition, while the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the intermediate position (see FIG. 100) to the operation limit position (see FIG. 101), the boss 12405 passes through the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward while moving in the right direction (leftward in FIGS. 100B and 101B), and the boss 12407 is a long hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward while moving in the left direction (the right direction in FIGS. 100B and 101B). The auxiliary coil spring 1290 applies a counterclockwise urging force with the bearing 12804 as a fulcrum to the auxiliary arm 1280. Therefore, the auxiliary coil spring 1290 exerts a force to push the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 upward. Supported.

  When the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates clockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates clockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12405 rotates counterclockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is a linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407 rotates clockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is a linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407. That is, the lower accessory movable ornament 1210 is lowered toward the origin position.

  While the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the operation limit position (see FIG. 101) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 100), the boss 12405 moves leftward in the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving in the right direction in FIGS. 100B and 101B, the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward, and the boss 12407 passes through the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward while moving in the right direction (the left direction in FIGS. 100B and 101B). While the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the intermediate position (see FIG. 100) to the origin position (see FIG. 99), the boss 12405 moves to the right in the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward while moving in the direction (leftward in FIGS. 99B and 100B), and the boss 12407 is in the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Is moved leftward (rightward in FIGS. 99 (B) and 100 (B)), and the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward.

  As described above, the height direction position of the rotation center of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the rotation center of the right driven gear 12406 are the same, and the diameter of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 The diameter is the same. Further, the linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 and the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 are the same distance (length). Therefore, when the lower accessory driving motor 1230 rotates, the height direction position of the boss 12405 and the height direction position of the right driven gear 12406 become the same. Here, since the lower accessory movable base 12102 is mounted with the LED substrate, the lower accessory movable ornament 1210 to be lifted has a considerable weight. Moreover, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is an accessory that is long in the left-right direction. When such an accessory is raised, there is a possibility that power is transmitted to either the left or right side. However, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, even if the object to be lifted is somewhat heavy or an accessory that is long in the left-right direction, only the rotational force (power) of one lower accessory drive motor 1230 is The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is stabilized (with a good balance in the left-right direction) while maintaining the posture when it is at the origin position (see FIG. 99) without power being transmitted to either the left or right side. It is possible to operate in the vertical direction.

  By the way, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is operated from the origin position to the operation limit position, the accessory control circuit 207 is required to operate the lower accessory drive motor 1230 from the origin position to the operation limit position. A pulse signal is output so as to rotate more than the proper rotational speed (so as to rotate beyond the operation limit position). The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 started to operate by the rotation of the lower accessory driving motor 1230 is physically caused by the boss 12405 colliding with the end portion of the hole 12204 and the boss 12407 colliding with the end portion of the hole 12206. Stopped. In this way, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 can be quickly operated from the origin position to the operation limit position.

  Here, the hole 12204 is formed from the center of the vertical direction line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 to the center side (right side of the drawing in FIG. 101A from the vertical direction line LL). Similarly, the hole 12206 is formed from the center of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 to the center side (left side of the paper in FIG. 101A from the vertical line LR). Therefore, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves to the operation limit position, the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position. That is, the boss 12405 is located on the center side (on the right side of the vertical direction line LL in FIG. 101A) with respect to the vertical direction line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404, and the center of the right driven gear 12406. The boss 12407 is positioned more centrally than on the line of the vertical ship LR passing through the OR (on the left side of the sheet in FIG. 101A than the vertical line LL).

  When the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost end position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly beyond the uppermost position, a downward force (for example, gravity) with respect to the lower accessory movable ornament 1210 , The rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 is restricted by the holes 12204 and 12206. Therefore, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 cannot rotate in either direction, and the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 is locked at this position.

  As described above, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves to the operation limit position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 does not drop due to gravity, and of course, external vibration such as vibration is applied to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210. Even if a strong force is applied, it does not descend and is held at the operation limit position unless the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates in the direction toward the origin position (clockwise). Accordingly, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is locked in a series of operations for moving the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 upward with a simple configuration without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism. It becomes possible to maintain the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 upward.

  If boss 12405 is not on the left side of vertical line LL passing through center OL of left driven gear 12404 (if boss 12407 is not on the right side of line of vertical direction LR passing through center OR of right driven gear 12406) The movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 downward is locked. Therefore, when the boss 12405 is on the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), The movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 toward is locked. When the boss 12405 is on the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), the lower accessory movable decoration The gravity of the body 1210 acts in the vertical direction, and the component force of the gravity is the rotation direction of the left driven gear 12404 (right driven gear 12406) (at the uppermost position, the left driven gear 12404 is horizontally left and right in the front view). This is because the driven gear 12406 does not act in the horizontal right direction when viewed from the front.

  In this embodiment, when the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost end position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost end position, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 Although the rotation is restricted, this is because the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) is to be held at the uppermost position, and the target accessory to be raised ( The movement range of the bosses 12405 and 12407 can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the position where the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of this embodiment is to be held. For example, the rotation range of the left driven gear 12404 is set to a position rotated 90 degrees further to the right side in the front view (on the right side in FIG. 101 (A) and on the left side in FIG. 101 (B)) relative to the vertical direction line LL. When the rotation range of the right driven gear 12406 is further rotated by 90 degrees to the left in the front view (on the left side in FIG. 101 (A) and on the right side in FIG. 101 (B)) relative to the vertical direction line LR, The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 can be held at an intermediate position between the upper end position and the lowermost position.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are rotated to rotate the boss 12405 and the boss 12407, so that the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102). ) Is moved up and down, however, the mode in which the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is moved up and down is not limited to this, and a force acting member (this embodiment) that applies force to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 The form bosses 12405 and 12407 are equivalent to each other as long as the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is moved up and down by moving in an arc. Therefore, instead of using gears (corresponding to the left driven gear 12404 and right driven gear 12406 of the present embodiment) for moving the force acting member, for example, the above-described portion is located at a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the center. You may use the rotation member etc. in which the force action member was formed.

  Further, the force acting member (equivalent to the bosses 12405 and 12407 in the present embodiment) can be moved while drawing a perfect arc when using a gear, but is not necessarily moved while drawing a perfect arc. It is not necessary, and it may be moved by drawing an arc of an ellipse. That is, when the moving direction of the force acting member becomes the horizontal direction, the symmetric character (the lower character movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment (more specifically, the lower character movable) The component of the load corresponding to the base 12102) becomes 0, and the force acting member does not move due to the load of the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment). Therefore, as long as the driving source of the force acting member (corresponding to the lower accessory driving motor 1230 of the present embodiment) is not driven in the direction in which the target accessory descends, a simple configuration without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism Thus, in the series of operations for moving the target combination upward, the target combination can be locked upward.

  In this embodiment, the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 (movement of the boss 12405 and boss 12407) is not stopped by stopping the driving of the lower accessory drive motor 1230, 12204 and 12206 are physically stopped. For example, when the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of this embodiment) is stopped above by the control of the motor (corresponding to the lower accessory driving motor 1230 of this embodiment), it stops. There is a possibility that the rotation of the motor must be decelerated in the vicinity of the upper position to be caused, and the ascending speed of the target accessory in the vicinity of the upper position may be reduced. In this regard, as in the present embodiment, by physically restricting the movement of the force acting member (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 in the present embodiment), the object character is selected unless the motor rotation is decelerated. It is possible to realize high-speed movement with a simple configuration without stalling near the upper position where it is desired to stop. Moreover, since the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are arranged side by side as a pair, even if the symmetric combination has a horizontally long shape, the target combination is maintained while maintaining the stability in the horizontal direction. The object can be raised and lowered.

  In the present embodiment, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in opposite directions in synchronization with each other. That is, the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 move in opposite directions in synchronization with each other. As a result, even if an external force (for example, vibration) is applied to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) in the left or right direction, the lower accessory drive motor As long as 1230 is not driven, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) can be locked near the uppermost position. This is because the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 does not descend unless the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 move in opposite directions.

[Corner character 1300]
The corner accessory 1300 includes the upper corner accessory 1320 and the lower corner accessory 1350 as described above. Here, first, the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described, then the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described, and then the mode when the corner accessory 1300 is operated to the operation limit position will be described.

[Composition of upper corner character 1320]
The structure of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 is an example of a front view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. 103 is an example of a rear view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. 104 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 as viewed obliquely from the upper front right. FIG. 105 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 viewed from the rear left (left in the front view) obliquely from above.

  The upper corner combination 1320 includes a fixed plate 1322 to which various members constituting the upper corner combination 1320 are attached, a first movable body 1330 and a second movable body 1340 configured to be operable with respect to the fixed plate 1322, A motor 1332 as a drive source for operating the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340, and a power transmission mechanism 1333 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1332 to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340. And a photosensor 1345 for confirming the origin positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340.

  The fixed plate 1322 is a horizontally long plate-like member that is attached and fixed to the upper side of the rear box 1800 of the rear unit 176 described above, on the rear side of the upper front accessory 1000 and the front side of the upper rear accessory 1100. Support shafts 13222, 13224, and 13226 are formed on the front surface side of the fixed plate 1322. A hole 13225 is formed between the support shaft 13222 and the support shaft 13224 in the left-right direction and above the support shafts 13222 and 13224. A hole 13229 is formed in the upper half of the periphery of the support shaft 13226 around the support shaft 13226.

  The 1st movable body 1330 is provided with the decoration part 13302 as a display body to which decorations, such as a character, were given, and the arm part 13304 comprised integrally with the decoration part 13302. FIG. A bearing 13306 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13222 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13304. A support shaft 13308 is formed at the upper right of the bearing 13306 in front view. The first movable body 1330 is rotatable around a bearing 13306 (support shaft 13222). In addition, a long linear slope 13307 is formed on the back surface of the first movable body 1330 along the movement direction of the first movable body 1330. The slope 13307 has a mountain shape that increases from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

  The 2nd movable body 1340 is provided with the decoration part 13402 as a display body to which decorations, such as a character, were given, and the arm part 13404 comprised integrally with the decoration part 13402. FIG. A bearing 13406 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13228 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13404. A support shaft 13408 is formed at the upper left of the bearing 13406 in front view. The second movable body 1340 is rotatable around a bearing 13406 (support shaft 13228). A long linear slope 13407 is formed on the back surface of the second movable body 1340 along the moving direction of the second movable body 1340. The slope 13407 has a mountain shape that increases from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

  The motor 1332 is attached and fixed to the fixed plate 1322 via the motor attachment member 1331. Further, the power of the motor 1332 is output from the motor output shaft 13322.

  The power transmission mechanism 1333 includes a first gear 1334, a second gear 1335, a third gear 1336, a first transmission arm 1337, and a second transmission arm 1338. The first gear 1334 and the second gear 1335 are engaged with each other, and the second gear 1335 and the third gear 1336 are engaged with each other. Power from the motor 1332 is transmitted to the first movable body 1330 via the gears 1334 and 1335. Power from the motor 1332 is transmitted to the second movable body 1340 via the gears 1334 to 1336.

  The first gear 1334 has a hollow shaft 13342 formed at the center. The hollow shaft 13342 is pivotally supported by the motor output shaft 13322 so that it can rotate coaxially with the motor output shaft 13322. The hollow shaft 13342 supported by the motor output shaft 13322 is located in the hole 13225.

  The second gear 1335 has a hollow shaft 13352 formed at the center. The hollow shaft 13352 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13224. In addition, a boss 13354 is formed on the front side of the second gear 1335 at a position away from the center by a predetermined distance radially outward.

  The third gear 1336 has a hollow shaft 13362 formed at the center. The hollow shaft 13362 is rotatably supported on the support shaft 13226. In addition, a boss 13364 is formed on the front side of the third gear 1336 at a position that is a predetermined distance away from the center radially outward. On the back side of the third gear 1336, a boss 13366 is formed at a position away from the center by a predetermined distance radially outward. The boss 13366 moves in the hole 13229 when the third gear 1336 rotates. The boss 13364 and the boss 13366 are formed on the surfaces opposite to each other substantially diagonally with respect to the center of the third gear 1336. A detection piece 13368 that can be detected by the photosensor 1345 is formed on the front surface of the third gear 1336.

  The first transmission arm 1337 includes a C-shaped curved portion 13370 and a rod-shaped portion 13371. A bearing 13372 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13371 side. The bearing 13372 is rotatably supported on the support shaft 13308. A bearing 13374 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13370 side. The bearing 13374 is rotatably supported by the boss 13354.

  The second transmission arm 1338 includes a C-shaped curved portion 13380 and a rod-shaped portion 13381. A bearing 13382 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13381 side. The bearing 13382 is rotatably supported on the support shaft 13408. A bearing 13384 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13380 side. The bearing 13384 is rotatably supported by the boss 13364.

  The photosensor 1345 detects the positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340. In this embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin positions (see FIG. 106 described later). ) So that the detection piece 13368 can be detected.

[Explanation of operation of upper corner accessory 1320]
Next, the operation of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 109. FIG. 106 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position. FIG. 107 is an example of a rear view showing the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 starting from the origin position. FIG. 108 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are further operated from the position shown in FIG. FIG. 109 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position.

  When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position, the first movable body 1330 is located at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the second movable body 1340 is located at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. Is located. At the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are disposed behind the upper front accessory 1000 (see, for example, FIG. 36), and thus are difficult to view in front view.

  When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position (see FIG. 106), the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (clockwise in FIGS. 106 to 109). , The first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise in front view, the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise in front view.

  When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13224 (hollow shaft 13352) in the front view, the boss 13354 (see FIG. 104) rotates clockwise around the hollow shaft 13352 (support shaft 13224) in the front view. To go around. When the boss 13354 rotates around the hollow shaft 13352 clockwise as viewed from the front, the bearing 13374 supported by the boss 13354 also rotates around the support shaft 13224 clockwise as viewed from the front. As a result, the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 moves leftward (rightward in FIGS. 106 to 109) in front view. Since the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13308 of the first movable body 1330, when the bearing 13372 moves to the left in the front view, the support shaft 13308 moves to the fixed plate 1322. The formed support shaft 13222 (bearing 13306) rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, with the rotation center as a rotation center. That is, the first movable body 1330 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front with the support shaft 13222 as the center of rotation. To the front).

  In addition, when the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13224 (hollow shaft 13352) as the center of rotation, the third gear 1336 counterclockwise when viewed from the front center around the hollow shaft 13362 (support shaft 13226). Rotate around. When the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 13226 as a center of rotation, the boss 13364 (see FIG. 104) rotates around the hollow shaft 13362 counterclockwise around the front view. When the boss 13364 rotates around the hollow shaft 13362 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 moves rightward (leftward in FIGS. 106 to 109) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 is rotatably mounted on the support shaft 13408 of the second movable body 1340, when the bearing 13382 moves to the right in a front view, the support shaft 13408 is moved to the fixed plate 1322. The formed support shaft 13228 (bearing 13406) is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view with the rotation center. That is, the second movable body 1340 moves from the origin position toward the lower left (front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) with the support shaft 13228 as the rotation center.

  In this manner, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 can be operated synchronously by the rotation of one motor 1332.

  Further, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move from the origin position, which is difficult to see in a front view, in a direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are close to each other. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the outside of the field of view to the inside in the front view.

  When the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 rotates clockwise in front view, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 operate in a direction to return to the origin position by the movement opposite to the above-described movement. To do.

  By the way, when the first movable body 1330 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the fixed plate 1322 interfere with each other, and the first movable body 1330 smoothly moves to the origin position. There is a possibility that it cannot be restored. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the slope 13307 formed on the back surface of the first movable body 1330 slides with the flat portion of the fixed plate 1322, so that the first movable body 1330 can be smoothly returned to the origin position. ing. Similarly, for the second movable body 1340, the slope 13407 formed on the back surface of the second movable body 1340 slides on the flat portion of the fixed plate 1322, so that the second movable body 1340 is smoothly moved to the origin position. Recovery is possible.

[Configuration of Lower Corner Work 1350]
The configuration of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113. FIG. 110 is an example of a front view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. 111 is an example of a rear view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 as seen from diagonally upward on the front right. FIG. 113 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 as seen from the upper left side of the rear surface.

  The lower corner combination 1350 includes a fixed plate 1352 to which various members constituting the lower corner combination 1350 are attached, a third movable body 1355 and a fourth movable body 1357 configured to be operable with respect to the fixed plate 1352, A motor 1354 as a drive source for operating the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357, and a power transmission mechanism 1360 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1354 to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357. And a photosensor 1375 for confirming the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357.

  The fixed plate 1352 is a horizontally long plate-like member that is fixed to and attached to the lower side of the rear box 1800 on the back side of the middle panel 1500 and the front side of the lower accessory 1200. Support shafts 13522, 13523, 13524, 13525, 13526, 13527, 13528, and 13529 are formed on the front surface side of the fixed plate 1352. A hole 13530 is formed in the lower half of the periphery of the support shaft 13527 around the support shaft 13527.

  The third movable body 1355 includes a decoration portion 13552 as a display body on which decorations such as characters are applied, and an arm portion 13554 configured integrally with the decoration portion 13552. An arm cover 13559 is provided on the back surface of the arm portion 13554. A hole 135592 is formed at the center side end of the arm cover 13559. A bearing 13556 that pivotally supports the support shaft 13524 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13554. A support shaft 13558 is formed at the lower right of the bearing 13556 when viewed from the front. The third movable body 1355 is rotatable about a support shaft 13524 on which the bearing 13556 is pivotally supported. A coil spring 1395 is provided between the bearing 13556 of the arm portion 13554 and the hole 135592 of the arm cover 13559. The coil spring 1395 is biased clockwise with the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation. As a result, a clockwise urging force about the support shaft 13524 acts on the third movable body 1355. Further, a long linear slope 13557 is formed on the back surface of the third movable body 1355 along the moving direction of the third movable body 1355. The slope 13557 has a mountain shape that increases from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

  The fourth movable body 1357 includes a decoration part 13572 as a display body on which decorations such as characters are applied, and an arm part 13574 configured integrally with the decoration part 13572. An arm cover 13579 is provided on the back surface of the arm portion 13574. A hole 135792 is formed at the center side end of the arm cover 13579. A bearing 13576 that pivotally supports the support shaft 13529 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13574. A support shaft 13578 is formed on the lower left side of the bearing 13576 when viewed from the front. The fourth movable body 1357 is rotatable about a support shaft 13529 on which the bearing 13576 is pivotally supported. A coil spring 1396 is provided between the bearing 13576 of the arm portion 13574 and the hole 135792 of the arm cover 13579. The coil spring 1396 biases counterclockwise about the support shaft 13529 as a center of rotation. As a result, a counterclockwise urging force about the support shaft 13529 acts on the fourth movable body 1357. Further, a long linear slope 13577 is formed on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357 along the moving direction of the fourth movable body 1357. The slope 13577 has a mountain shape that increases from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

  The motor 1354 is attached and fixed to the fixed plate 1352 via a motor attachment member 1356. The power of the motor 1354 is output from the motor output shaft 13542.

  The power transmission mechanism 1360 includes a first gear 1361, a second gear 1362, a third gear 1363, a fourth gear 1364, a fifth gear 1365, a sixth gear 1366, a seventh gear 1367, and each gear. 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366, 1367, a third transmission arm 1370 that transmits power from all or part of the third movable body 1355, and gears 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366 , 1367 and a fourth transmission arm 1372 for transmitting the power from all or part of the first movable body 1357 to the fourth movable body 1357.

  A hollow shaft 13612 is formed at the center of the first gear 1361. The motor output shaft 13542 is press-fitted into the hollow shaft 13612 so that it can rotate coaxially with the motor output shaft 13542.

  The power from the motor 1354 is transmitted in the order of the first gear 1361, the second gear 1362, the third gear 1363, the fourth gear 1364, the fifth gear 1365, the sixth gear 1366, and the seventh gear 1367. The sixth gear 1366 has a hollow shaft 13662 formed at the center and a boss 13664 formed at a predetermined distance from the center radially outward. Further, the sixth gear 1366 is formed with a detection piece 13666 that can be detected by the photosensor 1375 on the front surface at a position that is a predetermined distance away from the center radially outward. Further, the seventh gear 1367 is formed with a hollow shaft 13672 that pivotally supports the support shaft 13528 so as to be rotatable, and a boss 13684 is formed at a portion that is separated from the center by a predetermined distance radially outward.

  The third transmission arm 1370 has a C-shaped curved portion 13702 and a rod-shaped portion 13704. A bearing 13706 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13704 side. The bearing 13706 rotatably supports the support shaft 13558 of the third movable body 1355. A bearing 13708 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13702 side. The bearing 13708 rotatably supports the boss 13664 of the sixth gear 1366.

  The fourth transmission arm 1372 includes a C-shaped curved portion 13722 and a rod-shaped portion 13724. A bearing 13726 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13724 side. The bearing 13726 rotatably supports the support shaft 13578. A bearing 13728 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13722 side. The bearing 13728 pivotally supports the boss 13694 so as to be rotatable.

  The photosensor 1375 detects the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357. In this embodiment, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin positions (see FIG. 114 described later). ) Is attached so that the detection piece 13666 can be detected.

[Explanation of operation of lower corner accessory 1350]
Next, the operation of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 114 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position. FIG. 115 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 start operating from the origin position. FIG. 116 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position.

  When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position, the third movable body 1355 is positioned at the lower left corner of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the fourth movable body 1357 is the liquid crystal display device 16. Located in the lower right corner of the display area. Since the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are disposed behind the first middle panel 1520 and the second middle panel 1550 at the origin position, it is difficult to visually recognize the front view.

  When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position (see FIG. 114), the motor 1354 rotates, and the motor output shaft 13542 rotates clockwise in the front view (counterclockwise in FIGS. 114 to 116). The first gear 1361 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front. When the first gear 1361 rotates clockwise in front view, the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise in front view, the fourth gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the fourth gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the fifth gear 1365 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the fifth gear 1365 rotates clockwise in front view, the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front.

  When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 114 to 116) when viewed from the front with the support shaft 13527 (hollow shaft 13662) as the center of rotation, the boss 13664 (see FIG. 112) is centered on the hollow shaft 13662. As a front view, it goes around counterclockwise. When the boss 13664 rotates around the hollow shaft 13666 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 moves to the left (when viewed from the right in FIGS. 114 to 116). Since the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 rotatably supports the third movable body 1355 support shaft 13558, the support shaft 13558 is formed on the fixed plate 1352 when the bearing 13706 moves to the left in front view. The support shaft 13524 (bearing 13556) is rotated about the center of rotation in a clockwise direction in front view. That is, the third movable body 1355 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation, and as a result, the third movable body 1355 moves upward from the origin position.

  Further, when the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 13527 (hollow shaft 13662) as the center of rotation, the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13528 (hollow shaft 13672) as the center of rotation. Rotate around. When the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13528 as viewed from the front, the boss 13684 (see FIG. 112) rotates around the hollow shaft 13672 clockwise around the front. When the boss 13672 rotates around the hollow shaft 13672 clockwise as viewed from the front, the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 moves rightward (leftward in FIGS. 114 to 116) as viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 rotatably supports the support shaft 13578 of the fourth movable body 1357, when the bearing 13726 moves rightward in a front view, the support shaft 13578 is moved to the fixed plate 1352. The formed support shaft 13529 (bearing 13576) rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, with the rotation center as a rotation center. That is, the fourth movable body 1357 moves upward from the origin position with the support shaft 13529 as the rotation center.

  In this manner, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 can be operated in synchronization by the rotation of one motor 1354.

  In addition, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move in a direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are close to each other from an origin position that is difficult to view in front view. That is, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the outside of the field of view to the inside in the front view.

  When the motor 1354 rotates and the motor output shaft 1354 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 return to the original position due to the movement opposite to the above-described movement. Operate.

  By the way, when the third movable body 1355 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the third movable body 1355 and the fixed plate 1352 interfere with each other, and the third movable body 1355 smoothly moves to the origin position. There is a possibility that it cannot be restored. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the slope 13557 formed on the back surface of the third movable body 1355 slides on the flat portion of the fixed plate 1352 so that the third movable body 1355 can be smoothly returned to the origin position. ing. Similarly, with respect to the fourth movable body 1357, the slope 13777 formed on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357 slides on the flat portion of the fixed plate 1352, so that the fourth movable body 13570 is smoothly moved to the origin position. Recovery is possible.

[Mode when the corner accessory 1300 operates to the operation limit position]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119, a mode when the corner accessory 1300 is operated to the operation limit position will be described. FIG. 117 is a back unit showing a mode when all of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position in the corner accessory 1300. 176 is an example of a front view of FIG. In FIG. 118, when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position in the corner accessory 1300, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows the aspect of. FIG. 119 shows a case where the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 of the corner accessory 1300 are operated to the operation limit position, and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows the aspect of. However, in FIGS. 117 to 119, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the upper front part 1000, the lower part 1200, the middle panel 1500, and the attacker bulb 1600 is omitted.

  Although not shown, each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 has one character (for example, kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphabet) ) Is attached.

  117, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position, the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3). In the front, one design (for example, idiom) is formed by characters attached to the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355, 1357.

  As shown in FIG. 118, when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position, and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 3), one design (for example, idiom) is formed by characters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119, when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position, and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3), one design (for example, idiom) is formed by characters attached to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357.

  In this way, for example, by the accessory control circuit 207 (both see FIG. 7) of the sub CPU 201, the driving of the motor 1332 (see FIG. 104, for example) and the motor 1354 (see FIG. 113, for example) The first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 have a single design (hereinafter referred to as “first design”). Or a single design (hereinafter referred to as “second design”) with some (two) characters of the upper corner accessory 1320 (the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340). Or a single design (hereinafter referred to as “third design”) with some (two) characters of the lower corner accessory 1350 (the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357). Formed it becomes possible to or. Thereby, it becomes possible to change the visual impression given to the player by the movable effect due to the operation of the accessory with only a limited number of accessories.

  The design formed by two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 is information related to the progress of the game (for example, a big hit It is also possible for the player to recognize the information as a specific reach execution suggestion with high expectation. For example, when a specific reach effect that causes the player to expect a big hit is executed as a result of the big hit determination by the start winning to the first start opening 5442 or the second start opening 440, the specific The idioms indicating (or relating to) the reach effect are two or more movable bodies (a first movable body 1330, a second movable body 1340, a third movable body 1355 and a fourth movable body) in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It may be expressed by a design (for example, idiom) that can be recognized when any two or more of the movable bodies 1357 are arranged close to each other.

  In the present embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move in the direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 come close to each other from the origin position that is difficult to view in front view. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the upper outer side to the lower inner side in the front view.

  In addition, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move in a direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are close to each other from an origin position that is difficult to view in front view. That is, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the upper outer side of the field of view toward the lower inner side in front view.

  Here, letters are given to the front surfaces of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, respectively, but the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355, respectively. Each single character given to each of 1357 does not make sense, and information related to the progress of the game is not shown to the player.

  In addition, the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are all disposed at positions that are difficult to visually recognize at the origin position, and are respectively the upper left in the front view and the front. They are arranged at parts separated from the upper right of the view, the lower left of the front view and the lower right of the front view. Therefore, two or more of the one movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are directed from the outside to the inside of the player's field of view in a front view. In the process of the operation, it is difficult for the player to immediately recognize the design (for example, idiom) formed by the characters attached to the two or more movable bodies to be operated. It can only be recognized after being stopped in the vicinity of the display area of the device 16.

  As described above, two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 move from the outside to the inside of the field of view in front view. By doing this, the player's gaze can be moved from the back (effect image shown in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) to the near side (movable character that has advanced in front of the liquid crystal display device 16). Thus, conventionally, for example, information related to the progress of the game has been shown to the player by, for example, an effect image or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device, but according to the present embodiment, the information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 that have advanced to the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 without depending on the rendered image. Information relating to the progress of the game can be shown to the player only with the movable body. As a result, not only can the rhythm of the performance be changed, but an effect that has an impact on the player can be performed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position, the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3). In the front, it is preferable that one design is formed by characters attached to all the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355, and 1357, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the design is not necessarily limited thereto, and is attached to two or more of the movable bodies. One design may be formed only by letters. For example, among the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, one design is formed only by characters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the third movable body 1355. The second movable body 1340 and the fourth movable body 1357 (characters may not be attached) formed as such are present as mere separate movable bodies without constituting a design.

  In the present embodiment, one character is attached to each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Two or more characters may be attached to all or some of the movable bodies.

  In the present embodiment, the characters attached to each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are not limited thereto, but are limited to the liquid crystal. Any device may be used as long as it forms a design or forms a meaningful shape (for example, something that recalls a specific idea) in front of the display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 3).

  In the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are located in front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3). Although there is a gap between the movable body and another movable body, the present invention is not limited to this, and all or a part of the movable bodies may be combined to form one design.

  In the present embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 operate in synchronization with each other by the rotation of one motor 1332 (for example, see FIG. 104), and the third motor 1354 rotates by the rotation of one motor 1354. The movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are configured to operate in synchronization, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body. Each of the bodies 1357 may be configured to operate alone.

[Configuration of the side accessory 1400]
The configuration of the side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. FIG. 120 is an example of a front view of the side accessory 1400 in the normal mode (mode when it is at the origin position). FIG. 121 is an example of a rear view of the side accessory 1400 in the normal mode. FIG. 122 is an example of a front view of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 as viewed from the front right and diagonally above. FIG. 123 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 as viewed from the rear left (left in the front view) obliquely from above. In FIG. 121, various members such as the link member 1420 are shown through the mounting plate 1410 so that the members can be easily seen, but in actuality, they are opaque members.

  The side accessory 1400 includes a mounting plate 1410 to which various members constituting the side accessory 1400 are attached, a movable decorative body 1450 configured to be operable with respect to the mounting plate 1410, and a movable decorative body 1450 for operating the movable decorative body 1450. Positions of a side accessory motor 1440 as a drive source, a movable piece 1430 and an L-shaped link member 1420 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the side accessory motor 1440 to the movable ornament 1450, and the movable ornament 1450 And a photo sensor 1464 for confirming the above.

  The attachment plate 1410 is a vertically long plate-like member that is attached and fixed to the right side portion of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A link support shaft 1412 that pivotally supports the link member 1420 is formed on the upper portion on the front surface side of the mounting plate 1410. A movable decoration body support shaft 1414 that pivotally supports the movable decoration body 1450 is formed below the mounting plate 1410.

  The movable decorative body 1450 has a vertically long main body 1452 with a decoration on the front surface, and a single movable body configured to be operable with the main body 1452 as well as with respect to the main body 1452 alone. 1454. The main body portion 1452 of the movable decorative body 1450 has a movable decorative bearing 1458 that supports the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 below the main body portion 1452. The movable decorative body 1450 is pivotally supported on the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 in the movable decorative bearing 1458, and is configured to be rotatable about the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 (movable decorative bearing 1458). The movable decorative body 1450 has an origin confirmation movable piece 1456 at the lower end. Furthermore, the movable decorative body 1450 has a movable decorative boss 1455 that protrudes rearward on the right side when viewed from the front.

  The side accessory motor 1440 is attached and fixed to the attachment plate 1410 via a motor attachment member 1444. The side accessory motor 1440 is a motor with a speed reducer, and the rotational speed of the side accessory motor 1440 is reduced and power is output from the motor output shaft 1442.

  The movable piece 1430 includes a gear bearing 1432 connected to the side accessory motor 1440 by supporting the motor output shaft 1442 and a link member boss 1434 connected to the link member 1420. When the side accessory motor 1440 rotates, the movable piece 1430 rotates around the gear bearing 1432 (motor output shaft 1442) as the center of rotation.

  The link member 1420 includes a link bearing 1422 that supports the link support shaft 1412 of the mounting plate 1410, a first link 1421 that is long in the lateral direction, and a second link 1425 that is substantially perpendicular to the first link 1421 and that is long in the downward direction. And have. The link member 1420 is rotatable about a link support shaft 1412 supported by a link bearing 1422 as a rotation center. The first link 1421 is formed with a movable piece long hole 1424 to which the link member boss 1434 of the movable piece 1430 is slidably connected. The link member boss 1434 is slidable along the long hole direction of the movable piece long hole 1424 when the link member 1420 rotates around the link bearing 1422 as a rotation center. The second link 1425 is formed with a movable ornament body elongated hole 1426 to which the movable ornament boss 1455 of the movable ornament body 1450 is slidably connected. The movable decorative boss 1455 is slidable along the elongated hole direction of the movable decorative body elongated hole 1426 when the link member 1420 rotates around the link bearing 1422 as a rotation center.

  The photosensor 1464 is attached and fixed to the lower portion of the attachment plate 1410 via the photosensor attachment member 1460. The photo sensor 1464 detects the position of the movable decorative body 1450. As described above, in the present embodiment, the origin confirmation movable piece 1456 is provided at the lower end portion of the movable decorative body 1450, and the photosensor 1464 has the above origin confirmation movable when the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position. The piece 1456 can be detected. That is, the photosensor 1464 detects whether or not the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position.

[Description of operation of side accessory 1400]
Next, the operation of the side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 120, 121, and 124 to 128. FIG. 124 is a front view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 125 is a rear view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 126 is a front view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 127 is a rear view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 128 shows an example of the side accessory 1400 when the side accessory motor 1440 is further rotated in the same direction from the state in which the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is a rear view. Hereinafter, in this specification, the position at which the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is referred to as a “most advanced position”.

  The inclination degree of the link member 1420 when the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position is approximately 1 o'clock (see FIG. 121) in the rear view, and the link member 1420 when the movable decorative body 1450 is at the most advanced position. The degree of inclination is approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 127). In the present embodiment, the reduction ratio of the side accessory motor 1440 is such that when the side accessory motor 1440 makes one revolution, the motor output shaft 1442 moves from approximately 1 o'clock to approximately 4:30 (movable decorative body 1450). Is set to move from the origin position to the most advanced position), but the reduction ratio is not limited to this.

  In the most advanced position shown in FIG. 127, the movable decorative boss 1455 has not moved to the end of the movable decorative body elongated hole 1426. This is because the rotational direction about the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 (movable decorative body 1450) and the long direction of the movable decorative body elongated hole 1426 are different from each other. This is because the movement of the movable decorative boss 1455 is restricted by the side surface (the surface in the longitudinal direction).

  When the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position (a position where the inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view), the side accessory motor 1440 rotates and the motor output shaft 1442 rotates counterclockwise in the front view. When rotated counterclockwise in FIGS. 120, 124 and 126 and clockwise in FIGS. 121, 125, 127 and 128, the movable piece 1430 has the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432) as the center of rotation. Rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise around the gear bearing 1432 as the center of rotation, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece long hole 1424, and the link bearing 1422 ( A force that rotates in the clockwise direction (clockwise in FIG. 124, counterclockwise in FIG. 125) about the link support shaft 1412) as a center of rotation acts in front view. Then, when the link member 1420 rotates clockwise with the link bearing 1422 as the center of rotation in a front view, the force that pushes the movable decorative body 1450 toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 through the movable decorative boss 1455 is generated. Works. When the inclination degree of the link member 1420 is approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 127) and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 stops, the movable decorative body 1450 stops at the most advanced position.

  The side accessory motor 1440 further rotates from the state where the inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 4:30 (see FIG. 127) in the rear view, and the motor output shaft 1442 is counterclockwise in the front view (FIGS. 120 and 124). 126 and counterclockwise in FIG. 126 and clockwise in FIGS. 121, 125, 127, and 128), the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise in front view with the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432) as the center of rotation. Rotate to. When the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise around the gear bearing 1432 as the center of rotation, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece long hole 1424, and the link bearing 1422 ( A force that rotates in the clockwise direction (clockwise in FIG. 124, counterclockwise in FIG. 125) about the link support shaft 1412) as a center of rotation acts in front view. When the link member 1420 rotates clockwise around the link bearing 1422 as the center of rotation, a force to return the movable decorative body 1450 to the origin position acts on the movable decorative body 1450 via the movable decorative boss 1455. To do. When the inclination degree of the link member 1420 is approximately 1 o'clock in rear view (see FIG. 121) and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 stops, the movable decorative body 1450 stops at the origin position.

  As described above, the movable decorative body can be obtained by rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in the same direction (in the present embodiment, counterclockwise when viewed from the front) without causing the side accessory motor 1440 to rotate forward or reverse. 1450 can be reciprocated between the origin position and the most advanced position. When the link member 1420 moves from approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view (see FIG. 121) to approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 127), the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. On the other hand, when the link member 1420 moves from approximately 4:30 in the rear view to approximately 1 in the rear view, the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the most advanced position to the origin position. That is, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position can be realized only by moving the link member 1420 from approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view to approximately 4:30 in the rear view. The movement of the movable decorative body 1450 to the position requires that the link member 1420 moves from approximately 4:30 to 1 o'clock in the rear view.

  Therefore, not only when the rotational speed of the side accessory motor 1440 (motor output shaft 1442) is constant, but also from the origin position to the most advanced position unless the rotational speed of the side accessory motor 1440 varies greatly. The movable decorative body 1450 moves relatively quickly, and the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the most advanced position to the origin position relatively slowly. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position (movable body effect) is a hit determination performed when a game ball wins a prize at the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440. Although it is performed based on the result, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 is required to be performed quickly. On the other hand, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the most advanced position to the origin position does not require a quick movement compared to the movement from the origin position to the most advanced position. Therefore, the movable decorative body 1450 can be reciprocated between the origin position and the most advanced position only by rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in one direction (same direction), but the movable decorative body The rotation angle of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the 1450 to move from the origin position to the most advanced position is the rotation angle of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the movable decorative body 1450 to move from the most advanced position to the origin position. By making the angle smaller than the angle, the moving decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position is compared with the movement from the most advanced position to the origin position without changing the rotational speed of the side accessory motor 1440. It becomes possible to move quickly.

  The single movable body 1454 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position together with the movable decorative body 1450 when the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. By causing the 1454 to operate together with the main body 1452, the operation effect of the side accessory 1400 can be made more dynamic. However, instead of or in addition to this, when the movable decorative body 1450 is on standby between the origin position, the most advanced position, or the origin position and the re-advanced position, the independent body 1454 is attached to the main body 1452. You may make it operate.

[Configuration of Second Middle Panel 1550]
The configuration of the second middle panel 1550 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 129 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 as viewed obliquely from the upper front right. FIG. 130 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 viewed from the rear left (left in the front view) obliquely from above. 131A is an example of a front view of the second middle panel 1550, and FIG. 131B is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along line CC shown in FIG.

  The second middle panel 1550 includes a panel attachment case 1556 to which various members constituting the second middle panel 1550 are attached, an LED substrate 1560 on which LEDs 1562 and 1564 are arranged, a light guide lens 1570, a black sheet 1580, an inner A lens 1583, a decorative sheet 1584, a half mirror 1585, a window edge 1586 having the above-described opening window 1552, and a panel cover 1590 are provided.

  Panel attachment case 1556 is a case-like member that is fixedly attached to the lower right portion of rear box 1800 of back unit 176 described above.

  The LED substrate 1560 is a plate-like member on which an annular protrusion 1561 having a shape corresponding to the above-described opening window 1552 is formed and has a planar region 1563. On the LED substrate 1560, a plurality (five in this embodiment) of LEDs 1562 are annularly arranged on the radially inner side of the annular protrusion 1561, and a plurality of LEDs 1564 are arranged in the planar region 1563. The LED 1562 is provided so as to emit light toward the outer side in the radial direction. The LED 1564 is provided to emit light forward when viewed from the front.

  The light guide lens 1570 is provided so as to accommodate the LED substrate 1560 with the panel attachment case 1556. The light guide lens 1570 has a function of dispersing light emitted forward from the LED 1564 arranged on the LED substrate 1560 and emitting light in a planar shape. The light guide lens 1570 is formed with a hole having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552.

  The black sheet 1580 is attached to the back surface of the panel cover 1590. The black sheet 1580 is black on the front side, and has a watermark on the back side. The watermark cannot be visually recognized from the front in normal times (when the LEDs 1562 and 1564 are not emitting light), but appears on the panel cover 1590 when the LED 1562 and 1564 emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The black sheet 1580 has a hole having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552.

  The half mirror 1585, the decorative sheet 1584, and the inner lens 1583 are arranged so as to face the opening window 1552 in this order from the front. At this time, the inner lens 1583 is disposed in such a manner that the LED 1562 is accommodated inside in the radial direction (so as to be located outside the LED 1562 in the radial direction).

  The inner lens 1583 has a flange 15832 (see FIG. 131 (B)) that protrudes along the outer periphery to the back side when viewed from the front. Part of the light emitted from the LED 1562 toward the radially outer side is absorbed by the inner lens 1583, and the light that has not been absorbed passes through the inner lens 1583. The inner lens 1583 is partitioned into five fan-shaped regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 (see FIG. 130). Each of these five regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 has a plurality of notches formed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the radial direction. In addition, since the boundaries of the five regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 are inclined so that the height decreases from the peripheral portion toward the center of the circle, the light incident on the inner lens 1583 is It flows along the notch formed in the inner lens 1583 and gathers toward the radial center of the inner lens 1583. When light is incident on the inner lens 1583, the light intensity is stronger at the outer peripheral portion than at the central portion in the radial direction, but the surface of the inner lens 1583 is collected by collecting the incident light toward the central portion in the radial direction. It becomes possible to emit light more uniformly.

  The decorative sheet 1584 is a light-transmitting sheet on which a picture such as a character is drawn on the front surface. The character drawn on the decorative sheet 1584 cannot be viewed from the front by the half mirror 1585 under normal conditions (when the LED 1562 is not emitting light), but if the predetermined condition is satisfied and the LED 1562 emits light, the character is displayed in the area within the opening window 1552. Appears to emerge.

  The window edge 1586 is gloss plated and is configured to reflect light. Further, the window edge 1586 is formed with the above-described opening window 1552, and the outer peripheral portion is decorated so as to maintain the aesthetic appearance.

  The panel cover 1590 is a transparent plate-like member, and the black sheet 1580 is attached to the back side as described above. Further, the panel cover 1590 has a hole corresponding to the opening window 1552.

  The light emitted from the LED 1562 is emitted outward in the radial direction. A part of the light enters the flange 15832 (see FIG. 131) of the inner lens 1583, a part of the incident light is absorbed in the inner lens 1583, and the other light passes through the inner lens 1583 and has a diameter. Light is emitted toward the outside of the direction. The light transmitted through the inner lens 1583 and emitted outward in the radial direction is reflected on the radially inner surface 15862 (see FIG. 131) of the outer peripheral edge of the window edge 1586. The light reflected on the radially inner surface 15862 of the outer peripheral edge of the window edge 1586 is incident on the inner lens 1583 while changing the traveling direction of the light to the radially inward direction. In this way, light emitted from the LED 1562 is prevented from leaking to the outside as much as possible, and is absorbed by the inner lens 1583 as much as possible. In addition, since light is incident on the inner lens 1583 from the outer peripheral portion of the inner lens 1583, including the above-described part of light, the light can be dispersed along the surface of the inner lens 1583, and the surface can be uniformly formed. It is possible to emit light.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, the following gaming machines can be provided.

[Appendix 1]
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a win determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the win determination are known.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, a movable body effect is performed to operate the movable body in order to expect that the result of the winning judgment is advantageous to the player. There is something that can be improved.

  As such a movable body effect, for example, a technique is known in which the movable body is moved by an expansion / contraction operation of a pantograph and the movable body is tilted at the same time as the expansion / contraction operation of the pantograph is started (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-229582 See).

  However, in the gaming machine described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229582, when the operation of the movable body is started, a plurality of operations by the movable body such as movement and inclination of the movable body can be grasped. There is a limit to increasing the effect, and there is a risk that the interest will be reduced.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to raise a production effect by a movable body effect and to suppress the fall of an interest.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a main movable member (for example, movable) configured to be operable between a first position (for example, an origin position) and a second position (for example, an operation limit position). A decorative body 1110), a secondary movable member (for example, a covering decorative body 1120) configured to be operable in association with the operation of the main movable member when the main movable member is operated, and one end portion of which is predetermined. An arm mechanism (for example, a pantograph mechanism 1170) that is attached to the sub movable member and the other end of the main movable member is attached to the base member (for example, the base member 1180). When the operation is started, the sub-movable member is also operated in association therewith, and the arm mechanism is operated from the start of the operation of the main movable member to the second position. Restricting means (for example, restricting member 1190), and the sub movable member is provided so as to be movable relative to the main movable member, and the arm mechanism is operated by the restricting means. When regulated, the main movable member operates until reaching the second position, while the sub movable member stage operates relative to the main movable member.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the operation of the main movable member at the first position (for example, the origin position) is started, the sub movable member is also operated accordingly. However, the operation of the arm mechanism (for example, the pantograph mechanism 1170) is restricted until the main movable member reaches the second position, and the sub movable member operates relative to the main movable member. Therefore, at the time when the operation of the main movable member and the auxiliary movable member is started, it can be difficult to grasp how these movable members operate, and the movement of the movable member Interest can be improved and interest can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the arm mechanism (for example, the pantograph mechanism 1170) includes a pair of first arms (for example, a left upper arm 1172, a right upper arm) attached to the predetermined base member. 1176) and a pair of second arms having one end connected to the first arm and the other end attached to the sub movable member (for example, a left lower arm 1174 and a right lower arm 1178). And the pair of first arms and the pair of second arms form a substantially rhombus shape when the operation of the main movable member and the sub movable member that operates accompanying the main movable member is started. It is.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since the substantially rhombus shape is formed so as to avoid the central portion that is easy to enter the player's field of view, a mechanism for operating the main movable member and the sub movable member is provided from the player. It can be difficult to see.

  As the “substantially rhombus shape”, two sets of opposite sides among four sides (for example, four arms of a left upper arm 1172, a left lower arm 1174, an upper right arm 1176, and a right lower arm 1178) are parallel. (For example, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 are parallel, the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 are parallel), and the four sides have the same length, a parallelogram or a square Is also assumed. Of the four sides, two pairs of sides facing each other have the same length (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 have the same length, and the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 have the same length). Or the length may not be the same, and one of the two sets of opposite sides may have the same length and the other set may have different lengths. . That is, the length of the four sides is not limited to a specific length, and various variations can be adopted. Also, considering that each side operates, it is not always necessary that the opposite sides are parallel. For example, in the case where an accessory is connected to an arm, driving of the accessory (ie, operation of the arm) Therefore, it may be in a form in which the sides facing each other change from a non-parallel state to a parallel state, or in a form from a parallel state to a non-parallel state. In addition, with regard to the above-mentioned “opposite sides are parallel”, it is assumed that it is difficult to obtain complete parallelism considering the structure when the accessory is driven. If they are facing the same direction, they are considered to be parallel (substantially parallel). Also, even if each of the four sides has a different length, considering that the accessory can move from the standby position (for example, the origin position) to the drive position (for example, the operation limit position). The lengths of the four sides are variously changed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above, the main movable member (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) is directed from the first position (origin position) to the second position (for example, operation limit position). When the operation starts, the main movable member moves away from the predetermined base member (for example, the base member 1180), and the arm mechanism (for example, the pantograph mechanism 1170) One arm (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176) is formed of a transparent member, and the pair of second arms (for example, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178) are moved by the main movable member. Accordingly, it is configured to move and be located behind the main movable member.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the main movable member (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) starts operating from the first position (origin position) to the second position (operation limit position), Since the main movable member moves away from a predetermined base member (for example, the base member 1180), the arm mechanism (for example, the pantograph mechanism 1170) is easily visible to the player. Therefore, the pair of first arms (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176) are made of a transparent member, and the pair of second arms (for example, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178) are mainly movable. It is configured to move along with the movement of the member so as to be positioned behind the main movable member, thereby making it difficult for the player to visually recognize both the pair of first arms and the pair of second arms. Can do.

(4) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a main movable member that can be operated from a first position (for example, an origin position) to a second position (for example, an operation limit position) by applying power (for example, , A movable decorative body 1110) and a sub movable member (for example, a coated decorative body) provided along with the main movable member and operatively attached thereto when power is applied to the main movable member. 1120), power is applied to the main movable member in the first position, and both the main movable member and the sub movable member start operation toward the second position, and then the second By restricting the operation only with respect to the sub-movable member of the main movable member and the sub-movable member before reaching the position, the main movable member is moved between the first position and the second position. Rules that can change the operation of movable members Means (e.g., restriction member 1190) is intended to include a.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (4), after both the main movable member and the sub movable member start operating toward the second position, the main movable member, the sub movable member, By restricting the operation only with respect to the sub movable member, it is possible to change the operation of the main movable member between the first position and the second position. Therefore, at the time when the operation of the main movable member and the sub movable member is started, it can be difficult to grasp how these movable members operate, and interest in the movement of the movable members. Can improve interest.

  As described above, according to the invention described in appendix 1, it is possible to enhance the effect by the movable body effect and suppress the decrease in the interest.

[Appendix 2]
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a win determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the win determination are known.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, an expected effect is made to expect that the result of the winning judgment is advantageous to the player so that the effect of the effect is enhanced. There is something.

  Examples of such an expected effect include a display effect displayed on a liquid crystal display and a movable object effect that operates a movable body. As a gaming machine in which a movable body effect is performed, a technique for moving a movable body in the vertical direction using a plurality of motors is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208).

  However, if the movable body is moved in the vertical direction using a plurality of motors, not only the structure becomes complicated, but also the control for operating the movable body, for example, it becomes necessary to synchronize the plurality of motors. May be complicated.

  In particular, in recent game machines, many movable bodies are provided so as to enhance the effect of production, so that it is required to perform a movable body effect with a simple configuration.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can perform a movable body effect with a simple structure.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a determination unit that determines whether to grant a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a movable member (lower accessory) configured to be operable according to a determination result of the determination unit. An operating mechanism capable of operating the movable member upward by receiving power from a predetermined driving source (lower accessory driving motor 1230) according to a determination result of the decorative cover 12104) and the determining means. (The lower accessory fixing base 1220 and the lower accessory driving motor 1230), and the operating mechanism is an operating mechanism that operates the movable member (lower accessory decorative cover 12104) upward. A first gear (left driven gear 12404) and a second gear (right driven gear 12406) of the same diameter provided in a pair are provided, and both the first gear and the second gear have a diameter from the rotation center. And has a boss (boss 12405,12407) a predetermined distance away site direction, characterized in that it is intended to rotate in synchronism with each other in the height direction position of the rotation center as the same.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the movable member can be moved up and down with a single drive source, so that the movable member can be moved up and down with a simple configuration, and a pair of gears (left By the driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406), the movable member can be operated upward with a good balance in the left-right direction.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, when the first gear (left driven gear 12404) rotates, the first corresponding to the movement locus of the first boss (boss 12405) of the first gear. Hole (hole 12204) and a second hole (hole 12206) corresponding to the movement locus of the second boss of the second gear when the second gear (right driven gear 12406) rotates. A base member (lower accessory fixing base 1220), wherein the first boss can move through the first hole, and the second boss can move through the second hole, The rotation range of the first gear and the second gear is regulated by the first hole and the second hole.

  According to the gaming machine (2), the first gear (left driven gear 12404) and the second gear (right driven gear 12406) are rotated by the first hole (hole 12204) and the second hole (hole 12206). Is stable, and the movable member can be moved up and down stably while maintaining the posture.

  As described above, according to the invention described in Supplementary Note 2, it is possible to enhance the effect by the movable body effect and suppress the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 2-2]
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a win determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the win determination are known.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, an expected effect is made to expect that the result of the winning judgment is advantageous to the player so that the effect of the effect is enhanced. There is something.

  Examples of such an expected effect include a display effect displayed on a liquid crystal display and a movable object effect that operates a movable body. As a gaming machine in which a movable body effect is performed, a technique for moving a movable body in the vertical direction using a plurality of motors is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208).

  However, if the movable body is moved in the vertical direction using a plurality of motors, not only the structure becomes complicated, but also the control for operating the movable body, for example, it becomes necessary to synchronize the plurality of motors. May be complicated.

  Also, in recent game machines, the movable body has a tendency to increase in size, and how to move such a large movable body at high speed while maintaining stability with a simple configuration is a problem. It has become.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of moving a movable body at high speed while maintaining stability with a simple configuration.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable member (for example, a lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) operable in the vertical direction, a predetermined drive source (for example, a lower accessory drive motor 1230), and the predetermined A force acting member (for example, bosses 12405 and 12407) capable of receiving the power from the driving source and actuating the movable member upward, and a movement restricting means (for example, restricting movement of the force acting member) , Holes 12204, 12206) formed in the lower accessory fixing base 1220, and the force acting members are provided on the left and right, and can be moved synchronously, for example, a first force acting member (for example, a boss 12405) and It has a second force acting member (for example, boss 12407), and the movement restricting means is configured such that the first force acting member and the second force acting member receive power from the predetermined drive source. Also characterized in that it is configured to restrict the movement of the first force application member and the second force acting member in a predetermined limit position.

  According to the above gaming machine (1), the movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) can be moved up and down by one drive source (for example, the lower accessory driving motor 1230), so that it can be moved with a simple configuration. In addition to being able to move the member up and down, the first force acting member (for example, the bosses 12405 and 12407) provided in the left and right direction can be operated with a good balance in the left and right direction.

  Moreover, since the movement of the first force acting member (for example, the boss 12405) and the second force acting member (for example, the boss 12407) is restricted by the movement restricting means, the movable accessory (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210). ) High-speed movement can be realized with a simple configuration without stalling the movable accessory at an upper position to be stopped.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the first rotation member having a substantially same diameter (for example, for example) provided in a pair in the left-right direction while rotating in synchronism with each other with the same position in the height direction of the rotation center. A left driven gear 12404) and a second rotating member (eg, right driven gear 12406), and the first force acting member (eg, boss 12405) and the second force acting member (eg, boss 12407) are respectively It is formed in the site | part which left | separated predetermined distance to the radial direction from the rotation center of the said 1st rotation member and the said 2nd rotation member.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the first force acting member (for example, the boss 12405) is formed at a position that is a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the rotation center of the first rotating member (for example, the left driven gear 12404). Since the second force acting member (for example, the boss 12407) is formed at a position that is a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the rotation center of the second rotating member (for example, the right driven gear 12406), the first rotating member And the stable high-speed movement of a movable member is realizable by simple structure which only rotates a 2nd rotation member.

  Thus, according to the invention described in appendix 2-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of moving the movable body at high speed while maintaining stability with a simple configuration.

[Appendix 3]
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a win determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the win determination are known.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, the movable body effect is made to move the movable body upward in order to expect that the result of the winning judgment is advantageous to the player. There is something that can enhance the production effect.

  As such a movable body effect, for example, a technique is known in which when the motor rotates, the protrusion of the rotating body rotates to the upper end, and the arm is moved upward by receiving a pressing force from the protrusion. (For example, refer to JP2014-76208A).

  However, in a gaming machine in which a movable body effect that moves the movable body upward is performed, in order to maintain the movable body moved upward, the load of the movable body is countered. Therefore, it is necessary to newly provide a lock mechanism or the like for continuously applying a load to the motor or holding the movable body moved upward.

  However, it is naturally not preferable to continue to apply a load to the motor, and providing a new lock mechanism is not preferable because not only the structure but also the control becomes complicated. This is particularly noticeable when the movable body is held upward for a certain time or more.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to make it possible to hold | maintain the movable accessory which moved upwards with a simple structure.

(1) In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a long hole (long hole 12106, 12108) is formed in the left-right direction, and a movable member (lower accessory decorative cover 12104) movable in the vertical direction is operated. A driving source (lower accessory driving motor 1230) that can be operated, and an operating mechanism (lower accessory fixing base 1220 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220) capable of operating the movable member upward by receiving power from the driving source. A lower accessory driving motor 1230), and the operating mechanism is formed with bosses (bosses 12405, 12407) formed at a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the center and receiving power from the driving source. A rotatable gear (left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12406) and a hole through which the boss penetrates, in a specific direction (clockwise in the front view for the left driven gear 12404) With respect to the right driven gear 12406, holes (holes 12204, 12206) correspond to the movement trajectory of the boss from the lowermost position toward the uppermost position as the gear rotates toward the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. And a base member (lower accessory fixed base 1220) configured so that the boss is movable in the hole, and the boss penetrating the hole of the base member is formed in the movable member. The inside of the elongated holes (long holes 12106, 12108) is movably connected, and the movable member is directed upward while moving in the elongated hole as the gear rotates in the specific direction. The drive source rotates the gear in the specific direction to operate the movable member upward, and the boss is in a vertical direction passing through the center of the gear. Until virtual line (LL, LR) is characterized in that rotating the gear to at least move.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the gear (left driven gear 12404, right driven) in a specific direction (clockwise in the front view for the left driven gear 12404, counterclockwise in the front view for the right driven gear 12406). When the movable member (lower accessory decorative cover 12104) is operated upward by rotating the gear 12406), the boss moves at least to the vertical imaginary lines (LL, LR) passing through the center of the gear. The gear rotates. At this time, the movable member is locked, and can be locked in a series of operations for moving the movable member upward with a simple configuration without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism, and the uppermost position. The movable member can be maintained at The movable member is locked in this way when the boss is on a vertical imaginary line passing through the center of the gear (that is, when the movable member is at the uppermost position), the gravity of the movable member acts in the vertical direction. This is because the gravitational force does not act in the gear rotation direction (at the uppermost position, the left driven gear 12404 is left when viewed from the front, and the right driven gear 12406 is right when viewed from the front).

(2) In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a long hole (long hole 12106, 12108) is formed in the left-right direction, and the movable member (lower accessory decorative cover 12104) movable in the vertical direction is operated. A driving source (lower accessory driving motor 1230) that can be operated, and an operating mechanism (lower accessory fixing base 1220 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220) capable of operating the movable member upward by receiving power from the driving source. A lower accessory driving motor 1230), and the operating mechanism is formed with bosses (bosses 12405, 12407) formed at a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the center and receiving power from the driving source. A rotatable gear (left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12406) and a hole through which the boss penetrates, in a specific direction (clockwise in the front view for the left driven gear 12404) Corresponds to the movement locus of the right driven gear 12406 so that the boss can move from the lowermost position to the position exceeding the uppermost position when the gear is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. Then, a hole (holes 12204, 12206) is formed, and a base member (lower accessory fixing base 1220) configured so that the boss can move in the hole is formed, and penetrates the hole of the base member. The boss is movably connected in a long hole (long hole 12106, 12108) formed in the movable member, and moves in the long hole as the gear rotates in the specific direction. However, when the movable member operates the movable member upward by rotating the gear in the specific direction, the movable source is operated in the upward direction. The gear is rotated such that the boss moves to a position exceeding a virtual imaginary line (LL, LR) passing through the center of the gear.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the gear (left driven gear 12404, right driven) in a specific direction (clockwise in the front view for the left driven gear 12404 and counterclockwise in the front view for the right driven gear 12406). When the movable member (lower accessory decorative cover 12104) is operated upward by rotating the gear 12406), the boss moves to a position exceeding the imaginary lines (LL, LR) in the vertical direction passing through the center of the gear. The gear rotates. At this time, the movable member is locked, and can be locked in a series of operations for moving the movable member upward with a simple configuration without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism, and the uppermost position. The movable member can be maintained at The reason why the movable member is locked in this manner is that the (holes 12204, 12206) formed in the base member (lower accessory fixing base 1220) function as a locking mechanism.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), the gear receives the power from the drive source and rotates in synchronization with the first gear (left driven gear 12404) and the second gear ( The first gear and the second gear are synchronized with each other in response to the power from the power source (clockwise and right driven in the front view of the left driven gear 12404). The gear 12406 is characterized in that the movable member is operated upward by rotating counterclockwise in a front view.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the first gear (left driven gear 12404) and the second gear (right driven gear 12406) are synchronized with each other in opposite directions (the left driven gear 12404 is clockwise in front view). The right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that the movable member can be stably moved up and down while maintaining the posture of the movable member.

  As described above, according to the invention described in Supplementary Note 3, it is possible to hold the movable accessory moved upward with a simple configuration.

[Appendix 3-2]
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a win determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the win determination are known.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, an expected effect is made to expect that the result of the winning judgment is advantageous to the player so that the effect of the effect is enhanced. There is something.

  Examples of such an expected effect include a display effect displayed on a liquid crystal display and a movable object effect that operates a movable body. As a gaming machine in which a movable body effect is performed, a technique for moving a movable body in the vertical direction is known (see, for example, JP-A-2014-76208).

  In recent years, variations in production have diversified. For example, after moving the movable body upward as well as moving the movable body in the vertical direction as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208. It is more preferable to perform an effect of holding the movable body at the upper position.

  However, for example, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, when an effect of holding the movable body at the upper position is performed after the movable body is moved upward, the movable body is moved to the upper position. It is necessary to continue to apply a load against the load of the movable body to the motor or to newly provide a lock mechanism or the like that holds the movable body in the upper position. In addition, since there are players who shake the gaming machine, it is necessary to consider the possibility that an external force such as vibration acts on the movable body.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can hold | maintain a movable body suitably in an upper position by simple structure.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention uses power from a movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) operable in the vertical direction and a predetermined driving source (for example, the lower accessory driving motor 1230). And a force acting member (for example, bosses 12405, 12407) capable of operating the movable member upward. The force acting members are arranged side by side and the movable member A first force acting member (for example, a boss 12405) and a second force acting member (for example, a boss 12407) configured so that the movement locus of the force acting member draws an arc when operating upward; When the first force acting member and the second force acting member are operated to move the movable member upward, the moving locus draws an arc and at least the moving direction is a horizontal position ( For example, the first force application member and the second force application member are configured to be in opposite directions when moving to the uppermost end position) and moving in the horizontal direction. And

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the moving direction of the movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) moves to the horizontal direction, the movable member is operated with the movable member facing upward. After that, a device such as a lock mechanism for holding the movable member at the upper position is continuously added to the drive source (for example, the lower accessory drive motor 1230) to counter the load of the movable member at the upper position. It is possible to hold the movable body at the upper position with a simple configuration without providing it. This is because at the position where the moving direction of the movable member is the horizontal direction, the gravity of the movable member acts in the vertical direction, and the component force of the gravity is in the rotational direction of the force acting member (left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12406). It does not work.

  In addition, when the moving direction of the first force acting member (for example, the boss 12405) and the second force acting member (for example, the boss 12407) becomes the horizontal direction, the moving direction of the first force acting member and the second force acting Since the moving direction of the member is substantially opposite, for example, even if an external force acts on the movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) in any one direction, the movable member Can be prevented from descending.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the first rotation member having a substantially same diameter (for example, for example) provided in a pair in the left-right direction while rotating in synchronism with each other with the same position in the height direction of the rotation center. A left driven gear 12404) and a second rotating member (eg, right driven gear 12406), and the first force acting member (eg, boss 12405) and the second force acting member (eg, boss 12407) are respectively It is formed in the site | part which left | separated predetermined distance to the radial direction from the rotation center of the said 1st rotation member and the said 2nd rotation member.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the first force acting member (for example, the boss 12405) is formed at a position that is a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the rotation center of the first rotating member (for example, the left driven gear 12404). Since the second force acting member (for example, the boss 12407) is formed at a position that is a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the rotation center of the second rotating member (for example, the right driven gear 12406), the first rotating member In addition, the movable member can be held at the upper position with a simple configuration in which the second rotating member is simply rotated in the opposite direction.

  Thus, according to the invention described in appendix 3-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably holding the movable body at the upper position with a simple configuration.

[Appendix 3-3]
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a win determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the win determination are known.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, an expected effect is made to expect that the result of the winning judgment is advantageous to the player so that the effect of the effect is enhanced. There is something.

  Examples of such an expected effect include a display effect displayed on a liquid crystal display and a movable object effect that operates a movable body. As a gaming machine in which a movable body effect is performed, a technique for moving a movable body in the vertical direction is known (see, for example, JP-A-2014-76208).

  In recent years, variations in production have diversified. For example, after moving the movable body upward as well as moving the movable body in the vertical direction as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208. It is more preferable to perform an effect of holding the movable body at the upper position.

  However, for example, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, when an effect of holding the movable body at the upper position is performed after the movable body is moved upward, the movable body is moved to the upper position. It is necessary to continue to apply a load against the load of the movable body to the motor or to newly provide a lock mechanism or the like that holds the movable body in the upper position.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to provide the game machine which can hold | maintain a movable body in an upper position by simple structure.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable member (for example, a lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) operable in the vertical direction, a predetermined drive source (for example, a lower accessory drive motor 1230), and the predetermined And a force acting member (for example, bosses 12405 and 12407) capable of operating the movable member upward by receiving power from the driving source. The force acting member moves the movable member upward. When the actuator is operated toward the position, the movement locus of the force acting member is configured to include a movement locus that draws an arc, and the predetermined drive source is a position where the movement direction of the force acting member is a horizontal direction. Alternatively, power is applied so that the force acting member moves to a substantially horizontal position exceeding the horizontal direction.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the moving direction of the movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) moves to the horizontal direction, the movable member is operated with the movable member facing upward. After that, a device such as a lock mechanism for holding the movable member at the upper position is continuously added to the drive source (for example, the lower accessory drive motor 1230) to counter the load of the movable member at the upper position. It is possible to hold the movable body at the upper position with a simple configuration without providing it. This is because at the position where the moving direction of the movable member is the horizontal direction, the gravity of the movable member acts in the vertical direction, and the component force of the gravity is in the rotational direction of the force acting member (left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12406). It does not work.

  Note that the number of force acting members (for example, bosses 12405, 12407) is not limited to a specific number, and may be one or may be two or more. Further, the arc drawn by the movement locus of the force acting member includes not only a perfect circle arc but also an elliptical arc. Furthermore, the arc drawn by the movement locus of the force acting member need not have a constant curvature, and the curvature may change in the middle of the movement locus. In addition, a straight line portion may be included in the movement locus of the force acting member. That is, in view of the gist of the present invention, it is sufficient that the moving direction of the force acting member can be the horizontal direction. Therefore, the number of force acting members is limited to a specific number, or the arc drawn by the moving locus of the force acting member is drawn. Obviously, it is not necessary to limit the arc to a specific arc or to limit the arc drawn by the movement locus of the force acting member to a certain curvature.

(2) The gaming machine described in (1) above, further includes a substantially circular rotating member (for example, left driven gear 12404, right driven gear 12406), and the force acting member (for example, bosses 12405, 12407) The rotary member is formed at a site that is a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the rotation center of the rotary member.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the force acting member (for example, the bosses 12405, 12407) is formed at a site that is a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the rotation center of the substantially circular rotating member. With a simple configuration that simply rotates the member, the movable member (for example, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210) can be efficiently operated upward.

  Thus, according to the invention described in appendix 3-3, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can hold the movable body at the upper position with a simple configuration.

[Appendix 4]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a gaming machine that performs a winning determination according to a winning at a start opening, and enters a big hit gaming state when the result of the winning determination is a specific result.

  In this type of gaming machine, a big prize opening is provided in the right game area, and the big prize opening is opened when the big hit gaming state is reached. When a game ball that has been driven into the right game area enters the big prize opening, it is detected by a count switch. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (see, for example, [0032] in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-110383). The game balls that have not entered the grand prize winning exit are discharged from the out exit.

  However, even if it becomes a big hit game state, not all game balls that have been driven into the right game area will enter the big prize opening, and such game balls will be accepted into the out mouth, so the game that saw this May feel disadvantaged and the interest may fall.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and the purpose thereof is to suitably suppress a decrease in interest even if a game ball is not accepted at a big winning opening provided in the right game area. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of such a situation.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of launching a game ball (for example, a game region 20) configured to allow a game ball to flow down into a left region and a right region, and to emit the game ball toward the game region. The launching means (for example, the launching device 15), a start port (for example, the second start port 440) that is provided in the left region and can receive the game ball, and wins based on the reception of the game ball to the start port Based on the determination means for performing the determination, the winning a prize opening provided in the right area (for example, the winning a prize opening 540), and the result of the winning determination, the game balls are received in the winning prize opening. A jackpot game execution means capable of executing a jackpot game that is facilitated, and a game ball that is provided on the most downstream side of the game area and is not accepted by any winning opening including the start opening and the big winning opening To discharge A game ball launched toward the right area during execution of the jackpot game, even if the game ball is not received by the grand prize port, A guide member (for example, a game ball guide member 580) that guides the game ball that has not been made to the left side region above the out port and allows the game ball to be received by the start port is further provided. .

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if a game ball launched toward the right region is not accepted by the grand prize opening, the game ball that is not accepted by the grand prize opening is located above the out mouth. Beyond that, it is guided to the left side area and can be received at the starting port. Therefore, even if a game ball launched toward the right region is not accepted by the big prize opening, a sense of expectation for the game ball is continued, and interest can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) has a movable member (for example, a blade member 4620) that facilitates the reception of the game ball into the starting port. ), And a game ball guided to the starting port by the guide member without being received by the large winning port (for example, the large winning port 540) is always guided to the upstream of the starting port. It is.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the game ball guided to the starting port by the guide member without being accepted by the large winning port (for example, the large winning port 540) is always guided to the upstream of the starting port. Even if the game ball launched toward the right region is not accepted by the big prize opening, it is possible to continue expectation for the game ball for a long time until the end.

  As described above, according to the invention described in appendix 4, even if the game ball is not received in the big prize opening provided in the right game area, it is possible to appropriately suppress the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 4-2]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a gaming machine that performs a winning determination according to a winning at a start opening, and enters a big hit gaming state when the result of the winning determination is a specific result.

  In this type of gaming machine, a big prize opening is provided in the right game area, and the big prize opening is opened when the big hit gaming state is reached. When a game ball that has been driven into the right game area enters the big prize opening, it is detected by a count switch. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (see, for example, [0032] in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-110383). The game balls that have not entered the grand prize winning exit are discharged from the out exit.

  However, even if it becomes a big hit game state, not all game balls that have been driven into the right game area will enter the big prize opening, and such game balls will be accepted into the out mouth, so the game that saw this May feel disadvantaged and the interest may fall.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and the purpose thereof is to suitably suppress a decrease in interest even if a game ball is not accepted at a big winning opening provided in the right game area. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of such a situation.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of launching a game ball (for example, a game region 20) configured to allow a game ball to flow down into a left region and a right region, and to emit the game ball toward the game region. A starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) that facilitates the reception of the game ball by operating the movable member (for example, the blade member 4620) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition with the firing means (for example, the launching device 15). ), Determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) for making a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination process in step S118) based on the reception of the game ball at the start opening, and a big winning opening (for example, the right winning area) , And a winning game (for example, in step S106) that facilitates the acceptance of the game ball to the winning game port based on the winning result of the winning determination 540) The jackpot game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing (winning hole opening process), and provided at the most downstream side of the game area, and accepted by any winning opening including the start opening and the large winning opening. An out-port (for example, out-port 57) that discharges a game ball that has not been played, and the game area that has not been received by the prize winning port despite flowing down the right-side area As a path, a downflow path (for example, a downflow path connecting the exit side portion of the game ball guiding member 580 and the out mouth 57) connecting the downstream side of the big winning opening and the out mouth is formed, and the big winning prize is formed. A flow path connecting the downstream side of the mouth and the out mouth is the start of the game ball that has not been received by the big prize opening even though the right region is flown, when the movable member is actuated. Receiving region acceptance is possible in the mouth (e.g., the second start hole receiving area), characterized in that it is configured to flow down toward the out-port on which via.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, a game ball that has not been accepted into the grand prize opening (for example, the grand prize opening 540) despite flowing down the right region is placed in the out mouth (for example, the out mouth 55). In the meantime, it passes through the above-mentioned acceptable area (for example, the second start port receiving area). Therefore, even if a game ball launched toward the right region is not accepted by the big prize opening, a sense of expectation for the game ball is continued, and interest can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) has a movable member (for example, a blade member 4620) that facilitates the reception of the game ball into the starting port. ), And the game ball that has passed through the receivable region (for example, the second start port receiving region) without being received by the large winning port (for example, the large winning port 540) is As long as the game ball can be easily received at the start port, it can be received at the start port.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the game ball that passes through the receivable area (for example, the second start opening receiving area) without being received by the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 540) is a movable member ( For example, as long as the blade member 4620) facilitates the reception of the game ball at the start port, it can be received at the start port (for example, the second start port 440), and thus the game ball launched toward the right region. Even if the game is not accepted by the special winning opening, it is possible to continue expectation of the game ball for a long time until the end.

  As described above, according to the invention described in appendix 4-2, even if the game ball is not received in the big prize opening provided in the right game area, it is possible to appropriately suppress the decrease in the interest. .

[Appendix 4-3]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a winning determination is made according to a winning at the first starting port or the second starting port, and when the result of the winning determination is a specific result, the gaming machine is in a big hit gaming state It has been known.

  In this type of gaming machine, for example, a path in which the game ball rolls toward the first start port is provided in the left game area. A game ball launched into the left game area may have a game ball that rolls along this route and heads to the first starting port, but does not roll along this route (without winning a prize at the general prize opening). There is also a game ball discharged from the outlet (see, for example, FIG. 1 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-092643).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine represented by the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-092643, when the launched game ball does not roll on the path toward the first starting port, Even if the path to the first starting port rolls, if it is not accepted by the first starting port, there is a high possibility that such game balls will be accepted by the out port. There is.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its purpose is to suppress a decrease in interest even if a game ball launched into the game area does not win the first starting opening. It is to provide a possible gaming machine.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a game area (for example, a game area 20) configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a launching unit (for example, a launching device) capable of launching the game ball toward the game area. 15), a first start port (for example, a first start port 5442) provided in the game area and capable of receiving a game ball; and receiving a game ball at the first start port or the second start port Based on the determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) for performing the winning determination (for example, the big hit determining process in step S118), the big winning port (for example, the big winning port 540) provided in the game area, and the result of the winning determination A jackpot game executor capable of executing a jackpot game (for example, a jackpot opening process in step S106) that facilitates the acceptance of a game ball to the jackpot based on the fact that (E.g., main CPU 101) and an out port (e.g., an out port) that is provided on the most downstream side of the game area and that is not received by any winning port including the start port and the big winning port. Mouth 57), and a second starting port (for example, second starting port 440) that can receive a game ball that has not been received by the first starting port until reaching the out port, The game area passes through the receivable area in which the game ball that was desired to be received by the first start opening can be received by the second start opening when the movable member is operated. It is configured to flow downward.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, a game ball that has not been received by the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442) is not allowed to reach the out port (for example, the out port 55). It passes through a receivable area (for example, the second start opening receiving area) that can be received by the two start openings (for example, second start opening 440). Therefore, even if the game ball launched toward the game area does not go to the route toward the first start port, or goes to such a route but is not accepted by the first start port, there is a sense of expectation for the game ball. It is continued and can improve interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) has a movable member (for example, a facilitating reception of game balls to the second starting port). , A blade member 4620) is provided, and a game ball that has not been received by the first starting port and has passed through the receivable region (for example, the second starting port receiving region) is As long as the reception of the game ball in the mouth is facilitated, it can be received in the second starting port.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the game ball that is not received by the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442) and passes through the acceptable region (for example, the second starting port receiving region) is movable. As long as the member (for example, the blade member 4620) facilitates the reception of the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440), it can be received by the second starting port. Even if the game ball fired in this way is not accepted by the first start opening, it is possible to continue to expect the game ball for a long time until the end.

  As described above, according to the invention described in appendix 4-3, even if the game ball launched into the game area does not win the first start opening, it is possible to appropriately suppress a decrease in interest. .

[Appendix 5]
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a win determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the win determination are known.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, a movable body effect is performed to operate the movable body in order to expect that the result of the winning judgment is advantageous to the player. There is something that can be improved.

  As such a movable body effect, for example, the movable body is moved by the expansion and contraction operation of the pantograph mechanism in which the link member and the link member are overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the movable body is inclined at the same time as the expansion and contraction operation of the pantograph mechanism starts. The technique is publicly known (for example, refer to JP 2011-229582 A).

  However, for example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229582, since the link member and the link member are stacked in the front-rear direction, the thickness of each link member must be reduced. As a result, there is a limit to enhancing the effect of the operation of the movable body, and there is a limit to further enhancing the interest.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to raise the production effect by a movable body effect, and to raise an interest further.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is operably supported by a predetermined member (for example, a base member 1180 (more specifically, a central plate 1188)), has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and intersects in the front-rear direction. A longitudinally long first longitudinal member (e.g., left upper arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176)) and operatively connected to the first longitudinal member, and having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, A longitudinally long second longitudinal member (for example, a left lower arm 1174 (right lower arm 1178)) that is long in a direction crossing the front-rear direction, and the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member are operated together. And the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member are the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member, respectively. The rearmost position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of one of the longitudinal members (for example, the rearmost position B2 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 (right lower arm 1178)) is the length of the other longitudinal member. Between the frontmost position and the rearmost position in the front-rear direction of the portion (for example, the front-most position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176) and the upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm) 1176) and the rear surface position B1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion).

(2) The gaming machine according to the present invention is operably supported by a predetermined member (for example, the base member 1180 (more specifically, the central plate 1188)), has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and intersects in the front-rear direction. A longitudinally long first longitudinal member (e.g., left upper arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176)) and operatively connected to the first longitudinal member, and having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, A longitudinally long second longitudinal member (for example, a left lower arm 1174 (right lower arm 1178)) that is long in a direction crossing the front-rear direction, and the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member are operated together. And the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member are the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member, respectively. The rearmost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of one of the longitudinal members (for example, the rearmost position B2 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 (right lower arm 1178)) is the longitudinal direction of the other longitudinal member. It is characterized by being arranged in a positional relationship that is substantially the same as the rearmost position in the front-rear direction of the portion (for example, the rearmost position B1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176)). .

(3) The gaming machine according to the present invention is operably supported by a predetermined member (for example, the base member 1180 (more specifically, the central plate 1188)), has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and intersects in the front-rear direction. A longitudinally long first longitudinal member (e.g., left upper arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176)) and operatively connected to the first longitudinal member, and having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, A longitudinally long second longitudinal member (for example, a left lower arm 1174 (right lower arm 1178)) that is long in a direction crossing the front-rear direction, and the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member are operated together. And the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member are the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member, respectively. The forefront position of the longitudinal portion of one of the longitudinal members in the front-rear direction (for example, the frontmost position F2 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 (right lower arm 1178)) is the longitudinal length of the other longitudinal member. It is characterized by being arranged in a positional relationship that is substantially the same as the foremost position in the front-rear direction of the part (for example, the front-most position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal part of the upper left arm 1172 (upper right arm 1176)). .

  According to the gaming machines of (1) to (3) above, the total thickness of the longitudinal members can be reduced without reducing the thickness of each of the longitudinal members (for example, the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178). It is possible to stack a plurality of actors in the front-rear direction, and to increase the size of the movable accessory. As a result, it is possible to execute a more dynamic movable effect, and it is possible to enhance the game fun of the movable effect more than ever. The “total thickness of the longitudinal members” does not mean the sum of the thickness of the first longitudinal member and the thickness of the second longitudinal member, but is the foremost in the front-rear direction among the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member. It means the thickness from the position to the rearmost position. That is, it means a value obtained by subtracting the thickness overlapped between the first longitudinal member and the second longitudinal member from the sum of the thickness of the first longitudinal member and the thickness of the second longitudinal member.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), the one longitudinal member includes an upper end of a longitudinal portion of the one longitudinal member (for example, an upper end 11743 of the left lower arm 1174 ( An extension portion (for example, an extension portion 11741 (extension portion 11781)) extending to a position exceeding the upper end 11783) of the lower right arm 1178 is formed, and is connected to another longitudinal member at the extension portion. It is characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (4), one elongated member and the other elongated member (for example, the elongated portion 11741 (the elongated portion 11781)) is formed on the one elongated member. For example, the operating range of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) can be further increased.

  As described above, according to the invention described in appendix 5, it is possible to enhance the stage effect by the movable body effect and further enhance the interest.

[Appendix 5-2]
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a win determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the win determination are known.

  In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, a movable body effect is performed to operate the movable body in order to expect that the result of the winning judgment is advantageous to the player. There is something that can be improved.

  As this type of gaming machine, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, a pair of left and right movable bodies are connected to a synchronization arm, and a single arm is used to operate the synchronization arm. A movable accessory device is disclosed in which a body is moved in the approaching / separating direction.

  However, in the gaming machine described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, the player can visually recognize the synchronization arm connected to the movable body, and the player's interest in the movable body effect is reduced, and the interest is reduced. There was a risk of it.

  In recent years, a gaming machine in which a connecting member (for example, a support member that supports the movable accessory) connected to the movable accessory is hidden behind the movable accessory has been disclosed. However, the arrangement and movement of the movable accessory are limited, and the original interest of the movable accessory may be lost, and the fundamental solution has not been achieved.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, The objective is to make it difficult to visually recognize the connection member connected with a movable accessory, and to suppress the fall of interest.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) operable according to establishment of a predetermined condition, a predetermined base member, and the movable accessory. If the movable combination is provided between the first position (for example, the origin position) and moves toward the second position (for example, the operation limit position of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176), the movable combination is provided. A connecting member (for example, a left lower arm 1174 and a right lower arm 1178) that changes its posture in accordance with the operation of the object, and the connecting member includes the first and second positions of the movable accessory. When the position is between the two positions, even if the posture is changed in a specific area behind the movable accessory (for example, the back of the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120), it is difficult to view in front view. Yo And the movable accessory is operable to move beyond the second position (e.g., the movable decorative body 1110), and the main accessory operates beyond the second position. When this is done, the secondary movable accessory (for example, the covering decorative body 1120) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the connecting member in front view by operating so as to be positioned in front of the connecting member that changes its posture beyond the specific region. ).

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the movable accessory is between the first position and the second position, it is assumed that the connecting member changes its posture in accordance with the operation of the movable accessory. However, since the posture of the connecting member only changes in a specific area behind the movable accessory, it is difficult to visually recognize the connecting member in a front view. Then, when the main movable combination is actuated beyond the second position, the connecting member changes its posture beyond the specific region, but the sub movable combination operates so as to be positioned in front of the coupling member. Therefore, even in such a case, it is difficult to visually recognize the connecting member in front view. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the connecting member without restricting the arrangement and movement of the main character, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), the connecting member (for example, the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178) has the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120). When operated from the first position (for example, the origin position) toward the second position (for example, the operation limit position of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176), it is vertical between the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. It is an arm-shaped member that changes its posture in the direction.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the connecting member is an arm-like member that changes its posture between the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, the connecting member is suitably used while increasing the operating range of the movable accessory. It becomes possible to make it difficult to visually recognize.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above, the arm-shaped member is a first arm-shaped member (for example, a left lower arm 1174, a right lower arm 1178), and one end is the predetermined base member A second arm-shaped member (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176) that is attached to the (for example, the base member 1180) side and whose other end portion is coupled to the first arm-shaped member side. Further, the second arm-shaped member may be configured such that the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) is moved from the first position (for example, the origin position) to the second position (for example, the upper left portion). When operating toward the arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176), the posture is changed in the vertical direction between the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, and at least Together when the movable won game is in the second position is visible as viewed from the front, are those constituted by a transparent member for visible parts in the front view.

  In the gaming machine of (3), the second arm-like member that cannot be hidden in front view when the movable accessory is operated beyond the second position even when the secondary movable accessory is actuated, It is composed of a transparent member so that it is difficult to see.

  As described above, according to the invention described in appendix 5-2, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by appropriately making it difficult to visually recognize the connecting member connected to the movable accessory.

[Appendix 6]
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a win determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the win determination are known.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is an expected effect for enhancing the effect by operating a movable accessory as an expected effect for expecting that the result of the winning determination is an advantageous result for the player.

  A gaming machine in which a moving effect is actuated to enhance the effect is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, a plurality of motors that operate each of the plurality of movable accessories are provided in order to operate the plurality of movable combinations.

  However, in recent years, there has been an increasing demand for productions using movable accessories such as production using more movable actors and production using large movable actors. It is necessary to secure space and not to complicate control.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of independently operating a plurality of movable accessories with a simple configuration. is there.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a main character (for example, movable decorative body 1110) that can be operated in a predetermined direction by one operation control from a predetermined driving source (for example, left motor 1151, right motor 1161). The main character is rotatably supported at one fulcrum (for example, holes 11102 and 11106), and the operation of the main character is not controlled from any power source including the predetermined drive source. A subsidiary item that can be operated following the operation (for example, the covering decorative bodies 1120 and 1124), and a restricting unit (for example, a pantograph mechanism 1170) that regulates the operation of the subsidiary item that follows the operation of the main component. When the operation of following the main character is restricted by the restricting means, the main character is rotated with respect to the main character around the one fulcrum. Is one operation control from the predetermined drive source to the main character (for example, one operation control in which the left motor 1151 only rotates counterclockwise, the right motor 1161 The main character and the sub character can be configured to perform different operations independently of each other only by one operation control such as only rotating around.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), one operation control from a predetermined driving source to the main character (for example, one operation control in which the left motor 1151 only rotates counterclockwise, the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise. The main character and the sub character can perform different operations independently of each other only by one operation control such as only rotating them. That is, without providing a power source for driving each of the main character and the sub character, the main character (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) and the sub character are only required to perform one operation control with respect to one drive source. (For example, the covering decorative bodies 1120 and 1124) can be operated independently of each other. As a result, space saving and simplification of configuration and control can be achieved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), the subsidiary character (for example, the covering decorative body 1120, 1124) follows the operation of the main character (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) by a gravitational action. The actuating means and the regulating means (for example, the pantograph mechanism 1170) regulates the operation of the accessory by gravity action.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since the secondary accessory (for example, the covering decoration body 1120) is operated using a natural force such as a gravity action, a driving source for operating the secondary accessory is provided. This is not necessary and can contribute to space saving and simplification of configuration and control.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (2), the restricting means includes a longitudinal member (for example, a left lower arm 1174, a right lower arm 1178) connected to the accessory, and the longitudinal The member is located behind the main character or / and the sub character, and has a posture (lower arm 1174) in a vertical direction between the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in accordance with the operation of the sub character. , 1178 direction), and the subsidiary member operates to be positioned on the front surface of the longitudinal member when the posture of the longitudinal member changes beyond a certain range, It is comprised so that it may not be exposed from the back of a main character or / and the said sub character.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the postures of the longitudinal members (for example, the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178) change beyond a certain range, the secondary members are positioned so as to be positioned in front of the longitudinal member. Since the accessory (for example, the covering ornaments 1120 and 1124) is activated, it is possible to prevent the elongate member from being exposed from behind the main accessory (movable ornament 1110) and the secondary accessory.

  Thus, according to the invention described in appendix 6, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a plurality of movable accessories to be independently operated with a simple configuration.

[Appendix 6-2]
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a win determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the win determination are known.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is an expected effect for enhancing the effect by operating a movable accessory as an expected effect for expecting that the result of the winning determination is an advantageous result for the player.

  A gaming machine in which a moving effect is actuated to enhance the effect is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-13599. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-13599, the operation of the movable accessory in the vertical direction is performed by the linear motion in the vertical direction by the driving mechanisms provided on both sides of the movable accessory.

  However, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-13599, the movable accessory is operated in the vertical direction by operating the movable accessory by a linear motion in the vertical direction by the driving mechanisms provided on both sides of the movable accessory. Although the operating range of the movable accessory can be increased, a large area is required for the installation space of the drive mechanism.

  In recent years, a game machine has been proposed in which a space for installing the drive mechanism is reduced by actuating the movable accessory by arc motion, but such a drive mechanism cannot linearly move the movable accessory. .

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to make it possible to linearly move a movable accessory in a larger operating range while reducing the installation space of the drive mechanism. It is to provide a gaming machine to be used.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a winning determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of step S118 and step S119) that performs a winning determination (for example, a hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition; Display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs a predetermined display based on the determination result, and a specific game advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result Based on the specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the big prize opening opening process in step S106) and the result of the winning determination, a movable accessory configured to be operable in front of the display means (for example, movable A decorative body 1110), a first arm (for example, a left transmission arm 1154) and a second arm (for example, a right transmission arm) that support the movable accessory from both sides. 1164) and a first drive transmission member (eg, left arm member 1155, driven gear 1156, drive gear) that transmits power from a predetermined drive source (eg, left motor 1151, right motor 1161) to the first arm. 1157) and a second drive transmission member (for example, a right arm member 1165, a driven gear 1166, and a drive gear 1167) that transmit to the second arm, the first drive transmission member and the second drive transmission member are respectively , In both sides of the display means when viewed from the front, within a range smaller than the operating range of the movable accessory and supporting one end of each of the first arm and the second arm, The first arm and the second arm perform an arc motion with the one end portion as a fulcrum while allowing the movable accessory to be slidable at the other end portion from both sides. Characterized by lifting.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first arm (for example, the left transmission arm 1154) and the second arm (for example, the right transmission arm 1164) each perform an arc motion with one end as a fulcrum. On the other hand, the movable accessory is supported from both sides to be slidable at the other end. Therefore, the installation space of the first drive transmission member (for example, the left arm member 1155, the driven gear 1156, and the drive gear 1157) and the second drive transmission member (for example, the right arm member 1165, the driven gear 1166, and the drive gear 1167) is movable. The movable accessory can be linearly moved in a larger operating range while being within a range smaller than the operating range of the object (for example, the movable decorative body 1110).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) is controlled by a single operation control from a predetermined drive source (for example, the left motor 1151, the right motor 1161). For example, a main component (for example, a movable decoration) that can be operated in a predetermined direction by one operation control in which the left motor 1151 only rotates counterclockwise and one operation control in which the right motor 1161 only rotates clockwise. Body 1110) and a secondary accessory (e.g., a body 1110) that is rotatably supported by the main actor at one fulcrum (e.g., holes 11102 and 11106) and that can be operated following the action of the main actor by gravity. If the operation of following the main actor is restricted by the gravitational action, the auxiliary accessory is provided with the one fulcrum. And it performs different operation from that of the main character object by rotating relative to the as heart protagonist thereof.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, one operation control (for example, the left motor 1151 from the predetermined driving source (for example, the left motor 1151, the right motor 1161) to the main character (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) is performed. Only the main action (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) and the sub-character (for example, the covering decoration) can be performed only by one operation control such as rotating counterclockwise and only one operation control such that the right motor 1161 is rotated clockwise. The body 1120, 1124) can perform different operations independently of each other. In other words, by operating the secondary role using a natural force such as gravity action, one operation control is performed for one drive source without providing a power source corresponding to each of the primary role and the secondary role. It is possible to cause the main character and the sub-character to perform different operations by simply performing the above. As a result, space saving and simplification of configuration and control can be achieved.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (2), the operation of the subsidiary character (for example, the covering decorative body 1120, 1124) that follows the main character (for example, the movable decorative body 1110) by the gravitational action is regulated. Longitudinal members (for example, a left lower arm 1174 and a right lower arm 1178) are further provided, and the longitudinal member is located behind the main character and / or the sub character, and The posture changes in the vertical direction (the direction in which the lower arms 1174 and 1178 face) between the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in accordance with the operation, and the auxiliary member has a constant posture of the longitudinal member. When changing beyond the range, it operates so as to be positioned in front of the longitudinal member.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the postures of the longitudinal members (for example, the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178) change beyond a certain range, the secondary members are positioned so as to be positioned in front of the longitudinal member. Since the accessory (for example, the covering ornaments 1120 and 1124) is activated, it is possible to prevent the elongate member from being exposed from behind the main accessory (movable ornament 1110) and the secondary accessory.

  As described above, according to the invention described in appendix 6-2, the movable accessory can be linearly moved in a larger operating range while saving the installation space of the drive mechanism.

[Appendix 6-3]
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a win determination and execute a game advantageous to the player according to the result of the win determination are known.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is an expected effect for enhancing the effect by operating a movable accessory as an expected effect for expecting that the result of the winning determination is an advantageous result for the player.

  As this type of gaming machine, for example, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2014-76208 discloses a movable accessory device that operates a movable body by operating a synchronous arm connected to the movable body. (See, for example, FIG. 16). Further, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-67739 discloses a gaming machine in which a driving mechanism for driving a movable body is hidden behind the movable body (see, for example, FIG. 33-8).

  For example, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-76208, when the movable body is actuated, the synchronization arm can be visually recognized from the player, and the interest may be reduced.

  Further, for example, according to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-67739, it is difficult for a player to visually recognize the drive mechanism that drives the movable body, but the drive mechanism is not exposed from the back surface of the movable body. Therefore, the arrangement and movement of the movable body may be limited.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its purpose is to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur due to the fact that a connecting member connected to a movable accessory can be visually recognized by a player. There is to do.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is operable based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a movable accessory (for example, a movable decorative body 1110 and a covered decorative body 1120) having decorations on the front surface, and a predetermined And a drive transmission support member (for example, drive transmission arms 1154, 1164) that is coupled to the movable combination and can support the movable combination while transmitting power from the predetermined drive source to the movable combination. ), And a decorative member (for example, decorative covers 1130 and 1140) provided between the predetermined drive source and the drive transmission support member and having the same type of decoration as the movable accessory on its front surface. The drive transmission support member is provided between the movable accessory and the decorative member so as to be visible in a front view, and the same type of decoration as the movable accessory and the decorative member is provided on the front surface. Characterized in that the continuity of the movable won game and the decorative member is adapted to be maintained.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, on the front surface of the drive transmission support member (for example, the drive transmission arms 1154 and 1164), the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) and the decorative member ( For example, the same type of decoration as the decorative covers 1130 and 1140) is provided on the front surface, thereby maintaining the continuity between the drive transmission support member, the movable accessory, and the decorative member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur due to the player being able to visually recognize the drive transmission support member connected to the movable accessory. That is, the present invention is different from the conventional idea of making it difficult for a player to visually recognize a member that supports or is connected to a movable accessory (the drive transmission support member of the present invention is equivalent). It was made visible to the player and focused on how to prevent the player from being aware of such a movable accessory. It is assimilated with the member.

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), the drive transmission support member (drive transmission arms 1154 and 1164) includes the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120). The front surface is decorated so that continuity between the movable accessory and the decorative member is maintained regardless of the operating range of the object.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even when the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) is activated, the drive transmission support member and the movable accessory and the decorative member are continuously connected. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will be aware of the drive transmission support member by the operation of the movable accessory.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), at least the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120), the drive transmission support member (drive transmission arms 1154, 1164). In addition, a character shape is formed by the decorative members (decorative covers 1130 and 1140).

  According to the above gaming machine (3), at least the movable accessory (for example, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120), the drive transmission support member (drive transmission arm 1154, 1164), and the decorative member (decorative covers 1130, 1140). In addition to the same type of decoration on the front surface of), the same character shape is formed by these, so that the drive transmission support member is connected to other peripheral members such as movable accessories and decoration members. It can be further assimilated.

  As described above, according to the invention described in appendix 6-3, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur due to the fact that the connecting member connected to the movable accessory can be visually recognized by the player.

[Appendix 7]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines that perform a winning determination and display an effect image corresponding to the result of the winning determination on a display device such as a liquid crystal display are known.

  In this type of gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine that displays a notice image (reach notice) indicating that a reach effect display mode is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-200284). reference). In this way, by performing the notice image indicating that the reach notice is performed, the visual effect can be improved, and as a result, the interest in the reach notice can be improved.

  However, the amount of information displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display including the information on the reach notice is very large, and the player may miss important information related to the progress of the game. In particular, in recent years, the frequency of reach notices has been increased in order to excite the entertainment of the game, and the production itself has become flashy, so the tendency is remarkable.

  Also, the player gets bored only by looking at the display displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display. In recent years, in addition to the effects performed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, an effect using a movable accessory is performed. In this case, the player is performed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display. Both the production and the production by the movable object had to be watched, and the burden on the player was large.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can easily convey important information related to the progress of the game to the player without increasing the burden on the player. It is to provide.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a first movable body (for example, the first movable body 1330) and a second movable body (for example, the first movable body), which are provided with a display body on the front surface and are difficult to view in front view. 2 movable body 1340), determination means (for example, main CPU 101 that performs the processing of step S118 and step S119) that performs a winning determination (for example, a hit determination) based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and the result of the winning determination Display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying information related to the progress of the game (for example, specific reach execution suggestion information with a high expectation degree of jackpot), the first movable body and the Each of the display bodies attached to the second movable body does not indicate information related to the progress of the game alone, but is attached to the display body attached to the first movable body and the second movable body. Table The first movable body that can indicate information related to the progress of the game (for example, specific reach execution suggestion information with a high expectation degree of jackpot) when arranged with the body, and is arranged to be difficult to see in front view, and The second movable body is configured to be movable in a direction close to each other in front of the display means from positions separated from each other outside the field of view in front view, based on the result of the determination of winning. When moving in directions close to each other, information relating to the progress of the game can be indicated by the display bodies attached to the front surfaces of the respective displays.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first movable body (for example, the first movable body 1330) and the second movable body (for example, the second movable body 1340) are separated from each other outside the field of view in front view. It is possible to shift the player's gaze from the display means to the first movable body and the second movable body by moving them from the position in a direction close to each other in front of the display means. Since the display bodies attached to the first movable body and the second movable body do not indicate information relating to the progress of the game alone, they are located at positions outside the field of view in front view. The player's gaze tends to be directed to the display means, not the first movable body or the second movable body. However, when the display body attached to the first movable body and the display body attached to the second movable body are arranged side by side, information related to the progress of the game (for example, execution indication information of a specific reach with a high expectation degree of jackpot) Therefore, it is considered that the player's gaze shifts from the display means to the first movable body and the second movable body by moving in the direction approaching each other in front of the display means. Further, for example, since it does not require the player to watch both the display means and the first movable body and the second movable body, there is little risk of increasing the burden on the player. It becomes easy to convey important information related to the progress of the game to the player.

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), the first movable body (for example, the first movable body 1330) and the second movable body (for example, the second movable body 1340) may be a predetermined base member ( For example, a linear slope (for example, slopes 13307 and 13407) is formed along the moving direction on the side facing the predetermined base member and attached to the rear box 1800). Is characterized by a mountain shape that increases from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the first movable body (for example, the first movable body 1330) and the second movable body (for example, the second movable body 1340) have predetermined base members (for example, rear boxes). 1800) is formed with a linear slope (for example, slopes 13307 and 13407) along the moving direction, and the linear slope increases from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center. Because of the mold shape, smooth transition between the first movable body and the second movable body can be realized.

  As described above, according to the invention described in Appendix 7, a gaming machine that can easily convey important information related to the progress of the game to the player without increasing the burden on the player with a simple configuration. be able to.

  Note that all inventions described in this embodiment and other embodiments can be applied to pachinko machines, game machines, slot machines, and all other gaming machines without departing from the spirit of the invention. it can.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 1110 Movable decoration body 1120 Cover decoration body 1180 Base member 1170 Pantograph mechanism 1190 Control member 1172 Left upper arm 1174 Left lower arm 1176 Upper right arm 1178 Right lower arm

Claims (2)

A movable member operable in the vertical direction;
A force acting member capable of receiving the power from a predetermined drive source and operating the movable member upward;
With
The force acting member is
The first force acting member and the second force acting member are arranged side by side and configured so that the movement locus of the force acting member draws an arc when the movable member is operated upward.
The first force acting member and the second force acting member are:
When the movable member is operated upward, the movement locus draws an arc and moves at least to a position where the movement direction becomes the horizontal direction, and the movement direction when the movement direction becomes the horizontal direction is the first force acting member. The gaming machine is configured to be in a substantially opposite direction to the second force acting member. The first rotation member and the second rotation member having substantially the same diameter provided as a pair in the left-right direction and rotating in synchronization with each other with the same height direction position of the rotation center,
The first force acting member and the second force acting member are respectively
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is formed at a position that is a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the rotation center of the first rotating member and the second rotating member.

Images